Merge branch 'linus' into irq/genirq
This commit is contained in:
1
.mailmap
1
.mailmap
@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
|
||||
Corey Minyard <minyard@acm.org>
|
||||
David Brownell <david-b@pacbell.net>
|
||||
David Woodhouse <dwmw2@shinybook.infradead.org>
|
||||
Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com>
|
||||
Domen Puncer <domen@coderock.org>
|
||||
Douglas Gilbert <dougg@torque.net>
|
||||
Ed L. Cashin <ecashin@coraid.com>
|
||||
|
38
CREDITS
38
CREDITS
@ -369,10 +369,10 @@ P: 1024/8462A731 4C 55 86 34 44 59 A7 99 2B 97 88 4A 88 9A 0D 97
|
||||
D: sun4 port, Sparc hacker
|
||||
|
||||
N: Hugh Blemings
|
||||
E: hugh@misc.nu
|
||||
W: http://misc.nu/hugh/
|
||||
D: Author and maintainer of the Keyspan USB to Serial drivers
|
||||
S: Po Box 234
|
||||
E: hugh@blemings.org
|
||||
W: http://blemings.org/hugh
|
||||
D: Original author of the Keyspan USB to serial drivers, random PowerPC hacker
|
||||
S: PO Box 234
|
||||
S: Belconnen ACT 2616
|
||||
S: Australia
|
||||
|
||||
@ -464,6 +464,11 @@ S: 1200 Goldenrod Dr.
|
||||
S: Nampa, Idaho 83686
|
||||
S: USA
|
||||
|
||||
N: Dirk J. Brandewie
|
||||
E: dirk.j.brandewie@intel.com
|
||||
E: linux-wimax@intel.com
|
||||
D: Intel Wireless WiMAX Connection 2400 SDIO driver
|
||||
|
||||
N: Derrick J. Brashear
|
||||
E: shadow@dementia.org
|
||||
W: http://www.dementia.org/~shadow
|
||||
@ -1681,7 +1686,7 @@ E: ajoshi@shell.unixbox.com
|
||||
D: fbdev hacking
|
||||
|
||||
N: Jesper Juhl
|
||||
E: jesper.juhl@gmail.com
|
||||
E: jj@chaosbits.net
|
||||
D: Various fixes, cleanups and minor features all over the tree.
|
||||
D: Wrote initial version of the hdaps driver (since passed on to others).
|
||||
S: Lemnosvej 1, 3.tv
|
||||
@ -2119,6 +2124,11 @@ N: H.J. Lu
|
||||
E: hjl@gnu.ai.mit.edu
|
||||
D: GCC + libraries hacker
|
||||
|
||||
N: Yanir Lubetkin
|
||||
E: yanirx.lubatkin@intel.com
|
||||
E: linux-wimax@intel.com
|
||||
D: Intel Wireless WiMAX Connection 2400 driver
|
||||
|
||||
N: Michal Ludvig
|
||||
E: michal@logix.cz
|
||||
E: michal.ludvig@asterisk.co.nz
|
||||
@ -2693,6 +2703,13 @@ S: RR #5, 497 Pole Line Road
|
||||
S: Thunder Bay, Ontario
|
||||
S: CANADA P7C 5M9
|
||||
|
||||
N: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez
|
||||
E: inaky.perez-gonzalez@intel.com
|
||||
E: linux-wimax@intel.com
|
||||
E: inakypg@yahoo.com
|
||||
D: WiMAX stack
|
||||
D: Intel Wireless WiMAX Connection 2400 driver
|
||||
|
||||
N: Yuri Per
|
||||
E: yuri@pts.mipt.ru
|
||||
D: Some smbfs fixes
|
||||
@ -3769,14 +3786,11 @@ S: The Netherlands
|
||||
|
||||
N: David Woodhouse
|
||||
E: dwmw2@infradead.org
|
||||
D: ARCnet stuff, Applicom board driver, SO_BINDTODEVICE,
|
||||
D: some Alpha platform porting from 2.0, Memory Technology Devices,
|
||||
D: Acquire watchdog timer, PC speaker driver maintenance,
|
||||
D: JFFS2 file system, Memory Technology Device subsystem,
|
||||
D: various other stuff that annoyed me by not working.
|
||||
S: c/o Red Hat Engineering
|
||||
S: Rustat House
|
||||
S: 60 Clifton Road
|
||||
S: Cambridge. CB1 7EG
|
||||
S: c/o Intel Corporation
|
||||
S: Pipers Way
|
||||
S: Swindon. SN3 1RJ
|
||||
S: England
|
||||
|
||||
N: Chris Wright
|
||||
|
@ -3,8 +3,9 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
state. This holds the regulator output state.
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
state. This reports the regulator enable status, for
|
||||
regulators which can report that value.
|
||||
|
||||
This will be one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -18,7 +19,8 @@ Description:
|
||||
'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not
|
||||
supplying power to the system..
|
||||
|
||||
'unknown' means software cannot determine the state.
|
||||
'unknown' means software cannot determine the state, or
|
||||
the reported state is invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts
|
||||
and microamps to determine regulator output levels.
|
||||
@ -53,9 +55,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
|
||||
measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts).
|
||||
measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts), for regulators
|
||||
which can report that voltage.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
|
||||
output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of
|
||||
@ -67,9 +70,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
|
||||
setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps).
|
||||
setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps), for regulators
|
||||
which can report that current.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
|
||||
output current level as this value is the same regardless of
|
||||
@ -81,8 +85,9 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
opmode. This holds the current regulator operating mode,
|
||||
for regulators which can report it.
|
||||
|
||||
The opmode value can be one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ Description:
|
||||
'standby'
|
||||
'unknown'
|
||||
|
||||
The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h
|
||||
The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/consumer.h
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
|
||||
output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of
|
||||
@ -104,9 +109,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
|
||||
output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
|
||||
output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts,
|
||||
for regulators which support voltage constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by
|
||||
@ -118,9 +124,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
|
||||
output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
|
||||
output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts,
|
||||
for regulators which support voltage constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by
|
||||
@ -132,10 +139,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
|
||||
output current limit setting for this domain measured in
|
||||
microamps.
|
||||
microamps, for regulators which support current constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by
|
||||
@ -147,10 +154,10 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
|
||||
output current limit setting for this domain measured in
|
||||
microamps.
|
||||
microamps, for regulators which support current constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by
|
||||
@ -185,7 +192,7 @@ Date: April 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
|
||||
current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer
|
||||
devices.
|
||||
@ -204,125 +211,102 @@ Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
|
||||
the system is suspended to memory.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
the system is suspended to memory, for voltage regulators
|
||||
implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
|
||||
the system is suspended to disk.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
the system is suspended to disk, for voltage regulators
|
||||
implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
|
||||
voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
|
||||
the system is suspended to standby.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
the system is suspended to standby, for voltage regulators
|
||||
implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
|
||||
memory.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
memory, for regulators implementing suspend mode
|
||||
configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk,
|
||||
for regulators implementing suspend mode configuration
|
||||
constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
|
||||
setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
|
||||
standby.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
|
||||
the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by
|
||||
platform code.
|
||||
standby, for regulators implementing suspend mode
|
||||
configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
|
||||
when suspended to memory.
|
||||
when suspended to memory, for regulators implementing suspend
|
||||
configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
This will be one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
'enabled'
|
||||
'disabled'
|
||||
'not defined'
|
||||
This will be one of the same strings reported by
|
||||
the "state" attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
|
||||
when suspended to disk.
|
||||
when suspended to disk, for regulators implementing
|
||||
suspend configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
This will be one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
'enabled'
|
||||
'disabled'
|
||||
'not defined'
|
||||
This will be one of the same strings reported by
|
||||
the "state" attribute.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
|
||||
Date: May 2008
|
||||
KernelVersion: 2.6.26
|
||||
Contact: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Each regulator directory will contain a field called
|
||||
Some regulator directories will contain a field called
|
||||
suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
|
||||
state when suspended to standby.
|
||||
state when suspended to standby, for regulators implementing
|
||||
suspend configuration constraints.
|
||||
|
||||
This will be one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
'enabled'
|
||||
'disabled'
|
||||
'not defined'
|
||||
This will be one of the same strings reported by
|
||||
the "state" attribute.
|
||||
|
@ -32,14 +32,16 @@ Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
Write:
|
||||
|
||||
<channel> [<bpst offset>]
|
||||
<channel>
|
||||
|
||||
to start beaconing on a specific channel, or stop
|
||||
beaconing if <channel> is -1. Valid channels depends
|
||||
on the radio controller's supported band groups.
|
||||
to force a specific channel to be used when beaconing,
|
||||
or, if <channel> is -1, to prohibit beaconing. If
|
||||
<channel> is 0, then the default channel selection
|
||||
algorithm will be used. Valid channels depends on the
|
||||
radio controller's supported band groups.
|
||||
|
||||
<bpst offset> may be used to try and join a specific
|
||||
beacon group if more than one was found during a scan.
|
||||
Reading returns the currently active channel, or -1 if
|
||||
the radio controller is not beaconing.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/scan
|
||||
Date: July 2008
|
||||
|
@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Description:
|
||||
internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be
|
||||
added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove
|
||||
operations.
|
||||
|
||||
Users: hotplug memory add/remove tools
|
||||
https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -19,6 +18,56 @@ Description:
|
||||
This is useful for a user-level agent to determine
|
||||
identify removable sections of the memory before attempting
|
||||
potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation
|
||||
|
||||
Users: hotplug memory remove tools
|
||||
https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device
|
||||
Date: September 2008
|
||||
Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device
|
||||
is read-only and is designed to show the name of physical
|
||||
memory device. Implementation is currently incomplete.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index
|
||||
Date: September 2008
|
||||
Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index
|
||||
is read-only and contains the section ID in hexadecimal
|
||||
which is equivalent to decimal X contained in the
|
||||
memory section directory name.
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
|
||||
Date: September 2008
|
||||
Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
|
||||
is read-write. When read, it's contents show the
|
||||
online/offline state of the memory section. When written,
|
||||
root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable
|
||||
memory section (see removable file description above)
|
||||
using the following commands.
|
||||
# echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
|
||||
# echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/removable
|
||||
contains a value of 1 and
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state contains the
|
||||
string "online" the following command can be executed by
|
||||
by root to offline that section.
|
||||
# echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state
|
||||
Users: hotplug memory remove tools
|
||||
https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
|
||||
|
||||
What: /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY
|
||||
Date: September 2008
|
||||
Contact: Gary Hade <garyhade@us.ibm.com>
|
||||
Description:
|
||||
When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY is a symbolic link that
|
||||
points to the corresponding /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryY
|
||||
memory section directory. For example, the following symbolic
|
||||
link is created for memory section 9 on node0.
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -170,16 +170,15 @@ Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
|
||||
u64
|
||||
dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
|
||||
|
||||
After setting the mask with dma_set_mask(), this API returns the
|
||||
actual mask (within that already set) that the platform actually
|
||||
requires to operate efficiently. Usually this means the returned mask
|
||||
This API returns the mask that the platform requires to
|
||||
operate efficiently. Usually this means the returned mask
|
||||
is the minimum required to cover all of memory. Examining the
|
||||
required mask gives drivers with variable descriptor sizes the
|
||||
opportunity to use smaller descriptors as necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
Requesting the required mask does not alter the current mask. If you
|
||||
wish to take advantage of it, you should issue another dma_set_mask()
|
||||
call to lower the mask again.
|
||||
wish to take advantage of it, you should issue a dma_set_mask()
|
||||
call to set the mask to the value returned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
|
||||
|
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ mapped only for the time they are actually used and unmapped after the DMA
|
||||
transfer.
|
||||
|
||||
The following API will work of course even on platforms where no such
|
||||
hardware exists, see e.g. include/asm-i386/pci.h for how it is implemented on
|
||||
hardware exists, see e.g. arch/x86/include/asm/pci.h for how it is implemented on
|
||||
top of the virt_to_bus interface.
|
||||
|
||||
First of all, you should make sure
|
||||
|
@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
|
||||
# To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
|
||||
# list of DOCBOOKS.
|
||||
|
||||
DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \
|
||||
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \
|
||||
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
|
||||
procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
|
||||
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
|
||||
gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
|
||||
genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
|
||||
mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml
|
||||
mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml
|
||||
|
||||
###
|
||||
# The build process is as follows (targets):
|
||||
|
@ -74,6 +74,14 @@
|
||||
!Enet/sunrpc/rpcb_clnt.c
|
||||
!Enet/sunrpc/clnt.c
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
<sect1><title>WiMAX</title>
|
||||
!Enet/wimax/op-msg.c
|
||||
!Enet/wimax/op-reset.c
|
||||
!Enet/wimax/op-rfkill.c
|
||||
!Enet/wimax/stack.c
|
||||
!Iinclude/net/wimax.h
|
||||
!Iinclude/linux/wimax.h
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="netdev">
|
||||
@ -98,9 +106,6 @@
|
||||
X!Enet/core/wireless.c
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
-->
|
||||
<sect1><title>Synchronous PPP</title>
|
||||
!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
</book>
|
||||
|
304
Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl
Normal file
304
Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
|
||||
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
|
||||
|
||||
<book id="regulator-api">
|
||||
<bookinfo>
|
||||
<title>Voltage and current regulator API</title>
|
||||
|
||||
<authorgroup>
|
||||
<author>
|
||||
<firstname>Liam</firstname>
|
||||
<surname>Girdwood</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<address>
|
||||
<email>lrg@slimlogic.co.uk</email>
|
||||
</address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
</author>
|
||||
<author>
|
||||
<firstname>Mark</firstname>
|
||||
<surname>Brown</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<orgname>Wolfson Microelectronics</orgname>
|
||||
<address>
|
||||
<email>broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com</email>
|
||||
</address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
</author>
|
||||
</authorgroup>
|
||||
|
||||
<copyright>
|
||||
<year>2007-2008</year>
|
||||
<holder>Wolfson Microelectronics</holder>
|
||||
</copyright>
|
||||
<copyright>
|
||||
<year>2008</year>
|
||||
<holder>Liam Girdwood</holder>
|
||||
</copyright>
|
||||
|
||||
<legalnotice>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
|
||||
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
|
||||
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
||||
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
|
||||
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
|
||||
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
|
||||
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
|
||||
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
|
||||
MA 02111-1307 USA
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
|
||||
distribution of Linux.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</legalnotice>
|
||||
</bookinfo>
|
||||
|
||||
<toc></toc>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="intro">
|
||||
<title>Introduction</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel
|
||||
interface to control voltage and current regulators.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control
|
||||
regulator power output in order to save power and prolong
|
||||
battery life. This applies to both voltage regulators (where
|
||||
voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where current
|
||||
limit is controllable).
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Note that additional (and currently more complete) documentation
|
||||
is available in the Linux kernel source under
|
||||
<filename>Documentation/power/regulator</filename>.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="glossary">
|
||||
<title>Glossary</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The regulator API uses a number of terms which may not be
|
||||
familiar:
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<glossary>
|
||||
|
||||
<glossentry>
|
||||
<glossterm>Regulator</glossterm>
|
||||
<glossdef>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Electronic device that supplies power to other devices. Most
|
||||
regulators can enable and disable their output and some can also
|
||||
control their output voltage or current.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</glossdef>
|
||||
</glossentry>
|
||||
|
||||
<glossentry>
|
||||
<glossterm>Consumer</glossterm>
|
||||
<glossdef>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Electronic device which consumes power provided by a regulator.
|
||||
These may either be static, requiring only a fixed supply, or
|
||||
dynamic, requiring active management of the regulator at
|
||||
runtime.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</glossdef>
|
||||
</glossentry>
|
||||
|
||||
<glossentry>
|
||||
<glossterm>Power Domain</glossterm>
|
||||
<glossdef>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The electronic circuit supplied by a given regulator, including
|
||||
the regulator and all consumer devices. The configuration of
|
||||
the regulator is shared between all the components in the
|
||||
circuit.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</glossdef>
|
||||
</glossentry>
|
||||
|
||||
<glossentry>
|
||||
<glossterm>Power Management Integrated Circuit</glossterm>
|
||||
<acronym>PMIC</acronym>
|
||||
<glossdef>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
An IC which contains numerous regulators and often also other
|
||||
subsystems. In an embedded system the primary PMIC is often
|
||||
equivalent to a combination of the PSU and southbridge in a
|
||||
desktop system.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</glossdef>
|
||||
</glossentry>
|
||||
</glossary>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="consumer">
|
||||
<title>Consumer driver interface</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This offers a similar API to the kernel clock framework.
|
||||
Consumer drivers use <link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-get'>get</link> and <link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-put'>put</link> operations to acquire and
|
||||
release regulators. Functions are
|
||||
provided to <link linkend='API-regulator-enable'>enable</link>
|
||||
and <link linkend='API-regulator-disable'>disable</link> the
|
||||
reguator and to get and set the runtime parameters of the
|
||||
regulator.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
When requesting regulators consumers use symbolic names for their
|
||||
supplies, such as "Vcc", which are mapped into actual regulator
|
||||
devices by the machine interface.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
A stub version of this API is provided when the regulator
|
||||
framework is not in use in order to minimise the need to use
|
||||
ifdefs.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="consumer-enable">
|
||||
<title>Enabling and disabling</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The regulator API provides reference counted enabling and
|
||||
disabling of regulators. Consumer devices use the <function><link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-enable'>regulator_enable</link></function>
|
||||
and <function><link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-disable'>regulator_disable</link>
|
||||
</function> functions to enable and disable regulators. Calls
|
||||
to the two functions must be balanced.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Note that since multiple consumers may be using a regulator and
|
||||
machine constraints may not allow the regulator to be disabled
|
||||
there is no guarantee that calling
|
||||
<function>regulator_disable</function> will actually cause the
|
||||
supply provided by the regulator to be disabled. Consumer
|
||||
drivers should assume that the regulator may be enabled at all
|
||||
times.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="consumer-config">
|
||||
<title>Configuration</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Some consumer devices may need to be able to dynamically
|
||||
configure their supplies. For example, MMC drivers may need to
|
||||
select the correct operating voltage for their cards. This may
|
||||
be done while the regulator is enabled or disabled.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The <function><link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-set-voltage'>regulator_set_voltage</link>
|
||||
</function> and <function><link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-set-current-limit'
|
||||
>regulator_set_current_limit</link>
|
||||
</function> functions provide the primary interface for this.
|
||||
Both take ranges of voltages and currents, supporting drivers
|
||||
that do not require a specific value (eg, CPU frequency scaling
|
||||
normally permits the CPU to use a wider range of supply
|
||||
voltages at lower frequencies but does not require that the
|
||||
supply voltage be lowered). Where an exact value is required
|
||||
both minimum and maximum values should be identical.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="consumer-callback">
|
||||
<title>Callbacks</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Callbacks may also be <link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-register-notifier'>registered</link>
|
||||
for events such as regulation failures.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="driver">
|
||||
<title>Regulator driver interface</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Drivers for regulator chips <link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-register'>register</link> the regulators
|
||||
with the regulator core, providing operations structures to the
|
||||
core. A <link
|
||||
linkend='API-regulator-notifier-call-chain'>notifier</link> interface
|
||||
allows error conditions to be reported to the core.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Registration should be triggered by explicit setup done by the
|
||||
platform, supplying a <link
|
||||
linkend='API-struct-regulator-init-data'>struct
|
||||
regulator_init_data</link> for the regulator containing
|
||||
<link linkend='machine-constraint'>constraint</link> and
|
||||
<link linkend='machine-supply'>supply</link> information.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="machine">
|
||||
<title>Machine interface</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This interface provides a way to define how regulators are
|
||||
connected to consumers on a given system and what the valid
|
||||
operating parameters are for the system.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="machine-supply">
|
||||
<title>Supplies</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Regulator supplies are specified using <link
|
||||
linkend='API-struct-regulator-consumer-supply'>struct
|
||||
regulator_consumer_supply</link>. This is done at
|
||||
<link linkend='driver'>driver registration
|
||||
time</link> as part of the machine constraints.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="machine-constraint">
|
||||
<title>Constraints</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
As well as definining the connections the machine interface
|
||||
also provides constraints definining the operations that
|
||||
clients are allowed to perform and the parameters that may be
|
||||
set. This is required since generally regulator devices will
|
||||
offer more flexibility than it is safe to use on a given
|
||||
system, for example supporting higher supply voltages than the
|
||||
consumers are rated for.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This is done at <link linkend='driver'>driver
|
||||
registration time</link> by providing a <link
|
||||
linkend='API-struct-regulation-constraints'>struct
|
||||
regulation_constraints</link>.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The constraints may also specify an initial configuration for the
|
||||
regulator in the constraints, which is particularly useful for
|
||||
use with static consumers.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="api">
|
||||
<title>API reference</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Due to limitations of the kernel documentation framework and the
|
||||
existing layout of the source code the entire regulator API is
|
||||
documented here.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
!Iinclude/linux/regulator/consumer.h
|
||||
!Iinclude/linux/regulator/machine.h
|
||||
!Iinclude/linux/regulator/driver.h
|
||||
!Edrivers/regulator/core.c
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
</book>
|
@ -41,6 +41,12 @@ GPL version 2.
|
||||
</abstract>
|
||||
|
||||
<revhistory>
|
||||
<revision>
|
||||
<revnumber>0.6</revnumber>
|
||||
<date>2008-12-05</date>
|
||||
<authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
|
||||
<revremark>Added description of portio sysfs attributes.</revremark>
|
||||
</revision>
|
||||
<revision>
|
||||
<revnumber>0.5</revnumber>
|
||||
<date>2008-05-22</date>
|
||||
@ -318,6 +324,54 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
|
||||
offset = N * getpagesize();
|
||||
</programlisting>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Sometimes there is hardware with memory-like regions that can not be
|
||||
mapped with the technique described here, but there are still ways to
|
||||
access them from userspace. The most common example are x86 ioports.
|
||||
On x86 systems, userspace can access these ioports using
|
||||
<function>ioperm()</function>, <function>iopl()</function>,
|
||||
<function>inb()</function>, <function>outb()</function>, and similar
|
||||
functions.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Since these ioport regions can not be mapped, they will not appear under
|
||||
<filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/</filename> like the normal memory
|
||||
described above. Without information about the port regions a hardware
|
||||
has to offer, it becomes difficult for the userspace part of the
|
||||
driver to find out which ports belong to which UIO device.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
To address this situation, the new directory
|
||||
<filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/</filename> was added. It only
|
||||
exists if the driver wants to pass information about one or more port
|
||||
regions to userspace. If that is the case, subdirectories named
|
||||
<filename>port0</filename>, <filename>port1</filename>, and so on,
|
||||
will appear underneath
|
||||
<filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/</filename>.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Each <filename>portX/</filename> directory contains three read-only
|
||||
files that show start, size, and type of the port region:
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
<itemizedlist>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<filename>start</filename>: The first port of this region.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</listitem>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<filename>size</filename>: The number of ports in this region.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</listitem>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<filename>porttype</filename>: A string describing the type of port.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</listitem>
|
||||
</itemizedlist>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
@ -339,12 +393,12 @@ offset = N * getpagesize();
|
||||
|
||||
<itemizedlist>
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>char *name</varname>: Required. The name of your driver as
|
||||
<varname>const char *name</varname>: Required. The name of your driver as
|
||||
it will appear in sysfs. I recommend using the name of your module for this.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>char *version</varname>: Required. This string appears in
|
||||
<varname>const char *version</varname>: Required. This string appears in
|
||||
<filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/version</filename>.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
@ -355,6 +409,13 @@ mapping you need to fill one of the <varname>uio_mem</varname> structures.
|
||||
See the description below for details.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>struct uio_port port[ MAX_UIO_PORTS_REGIONS ]</varname>: Required
|
||||
if you want to pass information about ioports to userspace. For each port
|
||||
region you need to fill one of the <varname>uio_port</varname> structures.
|
||||
See the description below for details.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>long irq</varname>: Required. If your hardware generates an
|
||||
interrupt, it's your modules task to determine the irq number during
|
||||
@ -448,6 +509,42 @@ Please do not touch the <varname>kobj</varname> element of
|
||||
<varname>struct uio_mem</varname>! It is used by the UIO framework
|
||||
to set up sysfs files for this mapping. Simply leave it alone.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Sometimes, your device can have one or more port regions which can not be
|
||||
mapped to userspace. But if there are other possibilities for userspace to
|
||||
access these ports, it makes sense to make information about the ports
|
||||
available in sysfs. For each region, you have to set up a
|
||||
<varname>struct uio_port</varname> in the <varname>port[]</varname> array.
|
||||
Here's a description of the fields of <varname>struct uio_port</varname>:
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<itemizedlist>
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>char *porttype</varname>: Required. Set this to one of the predefined
|
||||
constants. Use <varname>UIO_PORT_X86</varname> for the ioports found in x86
|
||||
architectures.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>unsigned long start</varname>: Required if the port region is used.
|
||||
Fill in the number of the first port of this region.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
|
||||
<listitem><para>
|
||||
<varname>unsigned long size</varname>: Fill in the number of ports in this
|
||||
region. If <varname>size</varname> is zero, the region is considered unused.
|
||||
Note that you <emphasis>must</emphasis> initialize <varname>size</varname>
|
||||
with zero for all unused regions.
|
||||
</para></listitem>
|
||||
</itemizedlist>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Please do not touch the <varname>portio</varname> element of
|
||||
<varname>struct uio_port</varname>! It is used internally by the UIO
|
||||
framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
</sect1>
|
||||
|
||||
<sect1 id="adding_irq_handler">
|
||||
|
@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
||||
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
|
||||
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
|
||||
|
||||
<book id="WANGuide">
|
||||
<bookinfo>
|
||||
<title>Synchronous PPP and Cisco HDLC Programming Guide</title>
|
||||
|
||||
<authorgroup>
|
||||
<author>
|
||||
<firstname>Alan</firstname>
|
||||
<surname>Cox</surname>
|
||||
<affiliation>
|
||||
<address>
|
||||
<email>alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk</email>
|
||||
</address>
|
||||
</affiliation>
|
||||
</author>
|
||||
</authorgroup>
|
||||
|
||||
<copyright>
|
||||
<year>2000</year>
|
||||
<holder>Alan Cox</holder>
|
||||
</copyright>
|
||||
|
||||
<legalnotice>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
|
||||
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
|
||||
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
|
||||
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
|
||||
version.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
||||
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
|
||||
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
|
||||
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
|
||||
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
|
||||
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
|
||||
MA 02111-1307 USA
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
|
||||
distribution of Linux.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</legalnotice>
|
||||
</bookinfo>
|
||||
|
||||
<toc></toc>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="intro">
|
||||
<title>Introduction</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The syncppp drivers in Linux provide a fairly complete
|
||||
implementation of Cisco HDLC and a minimal implementation of
|
||||
PPP. The longer term goal is to switch the PPP layer to the
|
||||
generic PPP interface that is new in Linux 2.3.x. The API should
|
||||
remain unchanged when this is done, but support will then be
|
||||
available for IPX, compression and other PPP features
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
<chapter id="bugs">
|
||||
<title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
<variablelist>
|
||||
<varlistentry><term>PPP is minimal</term>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
The current PPP implementation is very basic, although sufficient
|
||||
for most wan usages.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||||
|
||||
<varlistentry><term>Cisco HDLC Quirks</term>
|
||||
<listitem>
|
||||
<para>
|
||||
Currently we do not end all packets with the correct Cisco multicast
|
||||
or unicast flags. Nothing appears to mind too much but this should
|
||||
be corrected.
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||||
</variablelist>
|
||||
|
||||
</para>
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
<chapter id="pubfunctions">
|
||||
<title>Public Functions Provided</title>
|
||||
!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c
|
||||
</chapter>
|
||||
|
||||
</book>
|
@ -294,7 +294,8 @@ NOTE: pci_enable_device() can fail! Check the return value.
|
||||
|
||||
pci_set_master() will enable DMA by setting the bus master bit
|
||||
in the PCI_COMMAND register. It also fixes the latency timer value if
|
||||
it's set to something bogus by the BIOS.
|
||||
it's set to something bogus by the BIOS. pci_clear_master() will
|
||||
disable DMA by clearing the bus master bit.
|
||||
|
||||
If the PCI device can use the PCI Memory-Write-Invalidate transaction,
|
||||
call pci_set_mwi(). This enables the PCI_COMMAND bit for Mem-Wr-Inval
|
||||
|
@ -12,10 +12,14 @@ rcuref.txt
|
||||
- Reference-count design for elements of lists/arrays protected by RCU
|
||||
rcu.txt
|
||||
- RCU Concepts
|
||||
rcubarrier.txt
|
||||
- Unloading modules that use RCU callbacks
|
||||
RTFP.txt
|
||||
- List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980.
|
||||
torture.txt
|
||||
- RCU Torture Test Operation (CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST)
|
||||
trace.txt
|
||||
- CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs files and formats
|
||||
UP.txt
|
||||
- RCU on Uniprocessor Systems
|
||||
whatisRCU.txt
|
||||
|
304
Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
Normal file
304
Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
|
||||
RCU and Unloadable Modules
|
||||
|
||||
[Originally published in LWN Jan. 14, 2007: http://lwn.net/Articles/217484/]
|
||||
|
||||
RCU (read-copy update) is a synchronization mechanism that can be thought
|
||||
of as a replacement for read-writer locking (among other things), but with
|
||||
very low-overhead readers that are immune to deadlock, priority inversion,
|
||||
and unbounded latency. RCU read-side critical sections are delimited
|
||||
by rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock(), which, in non-CONFIG_PREEMPT
|
||||
kernels, generate no code whatsoever.
|
||||
|
||||
This means that RCU writers are unaware of the presence of concurrent
|
||||
readers, so that RCU updates to shared data must be undertaken quite
|
||||
carefully, leaving an old version of the data structure in place until all
|
||||
pre-existing readers have finished. These old versions are needed because
|
||||
such readers might hold a reference to them. RCU updates can therefore be
|
||||
rather expensive, and RCU is thus best suited for read-mostly situations.
|
||||
|
||||
How can an RCU writer possibly determine when all readers are finished,
|
||||
given that readers might well leave absolutely no trace of their
|
||||
presence? There is a synchronize_rcu() primitive that blocks until all
|
||||
pre-existing readers have completed. An updater wishing to delete an
|
||||
element p from a linked list might do the following, while holding an
|
||||
appropriate lock, of course:
|
||||
|
||||
list_del_rcu(p);
|
||||
synchronize_rcu();
|
||||
kfree(p);
|
||||
|
||||
But the above code cannot be used in IRQ context -- the call_rcu()
|
||||
primitive must be used instead. This primitive takes a pointer to an
|
||||
rcu_head struct placed within the RCU-protected data structure and
|
||||
another pointer to a function that may be invoked later to free that
|
||||
structure. Code to delete an element p from the linked list from IRQ
|
||||
context might then be as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
list_del_rcu(p);
|
||||
call_rcu(&p->rcu, p_callback);
|
||||
|
||||
Since call_rcu() never blocks, this code can safely be used from within
|
||||
IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
static void p_callback(struct rcu_head *rp)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct pstruct *p = container_of(rp, struct pstruct, rcu);
|
||||
|
||||
kfree(p);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unloading Modules That Use call_rcu()
|
||||
|
||||
But what if p_callback is defined in an unloadable module?
|
||||
|
||||
If we unload the module while some RCU callbacks are pending,
|
||||
the CPUs executing these callbacks are going to be severely
|
||||
disappointed when they are later invoked, as fancifully depicted at
|
||||
http://lwn.net/images/ns/kernel/rcu-drop.jpg.
|
||||
|
||||
We could try placing a synchronize_rcu() in the module-exit code path,
|
||||
but this is not sufficient. Although synchronize_rcu() does wait for a
|
||||
grace period to elapse, it does not wait for the callbacks to complete.
|
||||
|
||||
One might be tempted to try several back-to-back synchronize_rcu()
|
||||
calls, but this is still not guaranteed to work. If there is a very
|
||||
heavy RCU-callback load, then some of the callbacks might be deferred
|
||||
in order to allow other processing to proceed. Such deferral is required
|
||||
in realtime kernels in order to avoid excessive scheduling latencies.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
rcu_barrier()
|
||||
|
||||
We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive. This primitive is similar
|
||||
to synchronize_rcu(), but instead of waiting solely for a grace
|
||||
period to elapse, it also waits for all outstanding RCU callbacks to
|
||||
complete. Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Prevent any new RCU callbacks from being posted.
|
||||
2. Execute rcu_barrier().
|
||||
3. Allow the module to be unloaded.
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
|
||||
|
||||
The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier in its exit function
|
||||
as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1 static void
|
||||
2 rcu_torture_cleanup(void)
|
||||
3 {
|
||||
4 int i;
|
||||
5
|
||||
6 fullstop = 1;
|
||||
7 if (shuffler_task != NULL) {
|
||||
8 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_shuffle task");
|
||||
9 kthread_stop(shuffler_task);
|
||||
10 }
|
||||
11 shuffler_task = NULL;
|
||||
12
|
||||
13 if (writer_task != NULL) {
|
||||
14 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_writer task");
|
||||
15 kthread_stop(writer_task);
|
||||
16 }
|
||||
17 writer_task = NULL;
|
||||
18
|
||||
19 if (reader_tasks != NULL) {
|
||||
20 for (i = 0; i < nrealreaders; i++) {
|
||||
21 if (reader_tasks[i] != NULL) {
|
||||
22 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING(
|
||||
23 "Stopping rcu_torture_reader task");
|
||||
24 kthread_stop(reader_tasks[i]);
|
||||
25 }
|
||||
26 reader_tasks[i] = NULL;
|
||||
27 }
|
||||
28 kfree(reader_tasks);
|
||||
29 reader_tasks = NULL;
|
||||
30 }
|
||||
31 rcu_torture_current = NULL;
|
||||
32
|
||||
33 if (fakewriter_tasks != NULL) {
|
||||
34 for (i = 0; i < nfakewriters; i++) {
|
||||
35 if (fakewriter_tasks[i] != NULL) {
|
||||
36 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING(
|
||||
37 "Stopping rcu_torture_fakewriter task");
|
||||
38 kthread_stop(fakewriter_tasks[i]);
|
||||
39 }
|
||||
40 fakewriter_tasks[i] = NULL;
|
||||
41 }
|
||||
42 kfree(fakewriter_tasks);
|
||||
43 fakewriter_tasks = NULL;
|
||||
44 }
|
||||
45
|
||||
46 if (stats_task != NULL) {
|
||||
47 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_stats task");
|
||||
48 kthread_stop(stats_task);
|
||||
49 }
|
||||
50 stats_task = NULL;
|
||||
51
|
||||
52 /* Wait for all RCU callbacks to fire. */
|
||||
53 rcu_barrier();
|
||||
54
|
||||
55 rcu_torture_stats_print(); /* -After- the stats thread is stopped! */
|
||||
56
|
||||
57 if (cur_ops->cleanup != NULL)
|
||||
58 cur_ops->cleanup();
|
||||
59 if (atomic_read(&n_rcu_torture_error))
|
||||
60 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: FAILURE");
|
||||
61 else
|
||||
62 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: SUCCESS");
|
||||
63 }
|
||||
|
||||
Line 6 sets a global variable that prevents any RCU callbacks from
|
||||
re-posting themselves. This will not be necessary in most cases, since
|
||||
RCU callbacks rarely include calls to call_rcu(). However, the rcutorture
|
||||
module is an exception to this rule, and therefore needs to set this
|
||||
global variable.
|
||||
|
||||
Lines 7-50 stop all the kernel tasks associated with the rcutorture
|
||||
module. Therefore, once execution reaches line 53, no more rcutorture
|
||||
RCU callbacks will be posted. The rcu_barrier() call on line 53 waits
|
||||
for any pre-existing callbacks to complete.
|
||||
|
||||
Then lines 55-62 print status and do operation-specific cleanup, and
|
||||
then return, permitting the module-unload operation to be completed.
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
|
||||
be required?
|
||||
|
||||
Your module might have additional complications. For example, if your
|
||||
module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all
|
||||
the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining
|
||||
RCU callbacks to complete.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Implementing rcu_barrier()
|
||||
|
||||
Dipankar Sarma's implementation of rcu_barrier() makes use of the fact
|
||||
that RCU callbacks are never reordered once queued on one of the per-CPU
|
||||
queues. His implementation queues an RCU callback on each of the per-CPU
|
||||
callback queues, and then waits until they have all started executing, at
|
||||
which point, all earlier RCU callbacks are guaranteed to have completed.
|
||||
|
||||
The original code for rcu_barrier() was as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1 void rcu_barrier(void)
|
||||
2 {
|
||||
3 BUG_ON(in_interrupt());
|
||||
4 /* Take cpucontrol mutex to protect against CPU hotplug */
|
||||
5 mutex_lock(&rcu_barrier_mutex);
|
||||
6 init_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion);
|
||||
7 atomic_set(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count, 0);
|
||||
8 on_each_cpu(rcu_barrier_func, NULL, 0, 1);
|
||||
9 wait_for_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion);
|
||||
10 mutex_unlock(&rcu_barrier_mutex);
|
||||
11 }
|
||||
|
||||
Line 3 verifies that the caller is in process context, and lines 5 and 10
|
||||
use rcu_barrier_mutex to ensure that only one rcu_barrier() is using the
|
||||
global completion and counters at a time, which are initialized on lines
|
||||
6 and 7. Line 8 causes each CPU to invoke rcu_barrier_func(), which is
|
||||
shown below. Note that the final "1" in on_each_cpu()'s argument list
|
||||
ensures that all the calls to rcu_barrier_func() will have completed
|
||||
before on_each_cpu() returns. Line 9 then waits for the completion.
|
||||
|
||||
This code was rewritten in 2008 to support rcu_barrier_bh() and
|
||||
rcu_barrier_sched() in addition to the original rcu_barrier().
|
||||
|
||||
The rcu_barrier_func() runs on each CPU, where it invokes call_rcu()
|
||||
to post an RCU callback, as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1 static void rcu_barrier_func(void *notused)
|
||||
2 {
|
||||
3 int cpu = smp_processor_id();
|
||||
4 struct rcu_data *rdp = &per_cpu(rcu_data, cpu);
|
||||
5 struct rcu_head *head;
|
||||
6
|
||||
7 head = &rdp->barrier;
|
||||
8 atomic_inc(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count);
|
||||
9 call_rcu(head, rcu_barrier_callback);
|
||||
10 }
|
||||
|
||||
Lines 3 and 4 locate RCU's internal per-CPU rcu_data structure,
|
||||
which contains the struct rcu_head that needed for the later call to
|
||||
call_rcu(). Line 7 picks up a pointer to this struct rcu_head, and line
|
||||
8 increments a global counter. This counter will later be decremented
|
||||
by the callback. Line 9 then registers the rcu_barrier_callback() on
|
||||
the current CPU's queue.
|
||||
|
||||
The rcu_barrier_callback() function simply atomically decrements the
|
||||
rcu_barrier_cpu_count variable and finalizes the completion when it
|
||||
reaches zero, as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1 static void rcu_barrier_callback(struct rcu_head *notused)
|
||||
2 {
|
||||
3 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count))
|
||||
4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion);
|
||||
5 }
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
|
||||
immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
|
||||
value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
|
||||
are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
|
||||
rcu_barrier() returning prematurely?
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
rcu_barrier() Summary
|
||||
|
||||
The rcu_barrier() primitive has seen relatively little use, since most
|
||||
code using RCU is in the core kernel rather than in modules. However, if
|
||||
you are using RCU from an unloadable module, you need to use rcu_barrier()
|
||||
so that your module may be safely unloaded.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Answers to Quick Quizzes
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
|
||||
|
||||
Answer: Since there is no call_srcu(), there can be no outstanding SRCU
|
||||
callbacks. Therefore, there is no need to wait for them.
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
|
||||
be required?
|
||||
|
||||
Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally
|
||||
implemented for module unloading. Nikita Danilov was using
|
||||
RCU in a filesystem, which resulted in a similar situation at
|
||||
filesystem-unmount time. Dipankar Sarma coded up rcu_barrier()
|
||||
in response, so that Nikita could invoke it during the
|
||||
filesystem-unmount process.
|
||||
|
||||
Much later, yours truly hit the RCU module-unload problem when
|
||||
implementing rcutorture, and found that rcu_barrier() solves
|
||||
this problem as well.
|
||||
|
||||
Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
|
||||
immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
|
||||
value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
|
||||
are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
|
||||
rcu_barrier() returning prematurely?
|
||||
|
||||
Answer: This cannot happen. The reason is that on_each_cpu() has its last
|
||||
argument, the wait flag, set to "1". This flag is passed through
|
||||
to smp_call_function() and further to smp_call_function_on_cpu(),
|
||||
causing this latter to spin until the cross-CPU invocation of
|
||||
rcu_barrier_func() has completed. This by itself would prevent
|
||||
a grace period from completing on non-CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels,
|
||||
since each CPU must undergo a context switch (or other quiescent
|
||||
state) before the grace period can complete. However, this is
|
||||
of no use in CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels.
|
||||
|
||||
Therefore, on_each_cpu() disables preemption across its call
|
||||
to smp_call_function() and also across the local call to
|
||||
rcu_barrier_func(). This prevents the local CPU from context
|
||||
switching, again preventing grace periods from completing. This
|
||||
means that all CPUs have executed rcu_barrier_func() before
|
||||
the first rcu_barrier_callback() can possibly execute, in turn
|
||||
preventing rcu_barrier_cpu_count from prematurely reaching zero.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently, -rt implementations of RCU keep but a single global
|
||||
queue for RCU callbacks, and thus do not suffer from this
|
||||
problem. However, when the -rt RCU eventually does have per-CPU
|
||||
callback queues, things will have to change. One simple change
|
||||
is to add an rcu_read_lock() before line 8 of rcu_barrier()
|
||||
and an rcu_read_unlock() after line 8 of this same function. If
|
||||
you can think of a better change, please let me know!
|
167
Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt
Normal file
167
Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
|
||||
Using hlist_nulls to protect read-mostly linked lists and
|
||||
objects using SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU allocations.
|
||||
|
||||
Please read the basics in Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt
|
||||
|
||||
Using special makers (called 'nulls') is a convenient way
|
||||
to solve following problem :
|
||||
|
||||
A typical RCU linked list managing objects which are
|
||||
allocated with SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU kmem_cache can
|
||||
use following algos :
|
||||
|
||||
1) Lookup algo
|
||||
--------------
|
||||
rcu_read_lock()
|
||||
begin:
|
||||
obj = lockless_lookup(key);
|
||||
if (obj) {
|
||||
if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects
|
||||
goto begin;
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Because a writer could delete object, and a writer could
|
||||
* reuse these object before the RCU grace period, we
|
||||
* must check key after geting the reference on object
|
||||
*/
|
||||
if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected
|
||||
put_ref(obj);
|
||||
goto begin;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
rcu_read_unlock();
|
||||
|
||||
Beware that lockless_lookup(key) cannot use traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu()
|
||||
but a version with an additional memory barrier (smp_rmb())
|
||||
|
||||
lockless_lookup(key)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct hlist_node *node, *next;
|
||||
for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first);
|
||||
pos && ({ next = pos->next; smp_rmb(); prefetch(next); 1; }) &&
|
||||
({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; });
|
||||
pos = rcu_dereference(next))
|
||||
if (obj->key == key)
|
||||
return obj;
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
And note the traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu() misses this smp_rmb() :
|
||||
|
||||
struct hlist_node *node;
|
||||
for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first);
|
||||
pos && ({ prefetch(pos->next); 1; }) &&
|
||||
({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; });
|
||||
pos = rcu_dereference(pos->next))
|
||||
if (obj->key == key)
|
||||
return obj;
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Quoting Corey Minyard :
|
||||
|
||||
"If the object is moved from one list to another list in-between the
|
||||
time the hash is calculated and the next field is accessed, and the
|
||||
object has moved to the end of a new list, the traversal will not
|
||||
complete properly on the list it should have, since the object will
|
||||
be on the end of the new list and there's not a way to tell it's on a
|
||||
new list and restart the list traversal. I think that this can be
|
||||
solved by pre-fetching the "next" field (with proper barriers) before
|
||||
checking the key."
|
||||
|
||||
2) Insert algo :
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
We need to make sure a reader cannot read the new 'obj->obj_next' value
|
||||
and previous value of 'obj->key'. Or else, an item could be deleted
|
||||
from a chain, and inserted into another chain. If new chain was empty
|
||||
before the move, 'next' pointer is NULL, and lockless reader can
|
||||
not detect it missed following items in original chain.
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list,
|
||||
* not in the middle or end.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
obj = kmem_cache_alloc(...);
|
||||
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
|
||||
obj->key = key;
|
||||
atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt);
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* we need to make sure obj->key is updated before obj->next
|
||||
*/
|
||||
smp_wmb();
|
||||
hlist_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list);
|
||||
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3) Remove algo
|
||||
--------------
|
||||
Nothing special here, we can use a standard RCU hlist deletion.
|
||||
But thanks to SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU, beware a deleted object can be reused
|
||||
very very fast (before the end of RCU grace period)
|
||||
|
||||
if (put_last_reference_on(obj) {
|
||||
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
|
||||
hlist_del_init_rcu(&obj->obj_node);
|
||||
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()
|
||||
kmem_cache_free(cachep, obj);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
With hlist_nulls we can avoid extra smp_rmb() in lockless_lookup()
|
||||
and extra smp_wmb() in insert function.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if we choose to store the slot number as the 'nulls'
|
||||
end-of-list marker for each slot of the hash table, we can detect
|
||||
a race (some writer did a delete and/or a move of an object
|
||||
to another chain) checking the final 'nulls' value if
|
||||
the lookup met the end of chain. If final 'nulls' value
|
||||
is not the slot number, then we must restart the lookup at
|
||||
the begining. If the object was moved to same chain,
|
||||
then the reader doesnt care : It might eventually
|
||||
scan the list again without harm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1) lookup algo
|
||||
|
||||
head = &table[slot];
|
||||
rcu_read_lock();
|
||||
begin:
|
||||
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu(obj, node, head, member) {
|
||||
if (obj->key == key) {
|
||||
if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects
|
||||
goto begin;
|
||||
if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected
|
||||
put_ref(obj);
|
||||
goto begin;
|
||||
}
|
||||
goto out;
|
||||
}
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* if the nulls value we got at the end of this lookup is
|
||||
* not the expected one, we must restart lookup.
|
||||
* We probably met an item that was moved to another chain.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
if (get_nulls_value(node) != slot)
|
||||
goto begin;
|
||||
obj = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
out:
|
||||
rcu_read_unlock();
|
||||
|
||||
2) Insert function :
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list,
|
||||
* not in the middle or end.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
obj = kmem_cache_alloc(cachep);
|
||||
lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock()
|
||||
obj->key = key;
|
||||
atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1);
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* insert obj in RCU way (readers might be traversing chain)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list);
|
||||
unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock()
|
413
Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
Normal file
413
Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,413 @@
|
||||
CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The rcupreempt and rcutree implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace
|
||||
output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for
|
||||
debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU.
|
||||
Note that the rcuclassic implementation of RCU does not provide debugfs
|
||||
trace output.
|
||||
|
||||
The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats for
|
||||
preemptable RCU (rcupreempt) and hierarchical RCU (rcutree).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Preemptable RCU debugfs Files and Formats
|
||||
|
||||
This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the
|
||||
top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcuctrs (which displays the per-CPU
|
||||
counters used by preemptable RCU) rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period
|
||||
counters), and rcu/rcustats (which internal counters for debugging RCU).
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcuctrs" looks as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
CPU last cur F M
|
||||
0 5 -5 0 0
|
||||
1 -1 0 0 0
|
||||
2 0 1 0 0
|
||||
3 0 1 0 0
|
||||
4 0 1 0 0
|
||||
5 0 1 0 0
|
||||
6 0 2 0 0
|
||||
7 0 -1 0 0
|
||||
8 0 1 0 0
|
||||
ggp = 26226, state = waitzero
|
||||
|
||||
The per-CPU fields are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
o "CPU" gives the CPU number. Offline CPUs are not displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
o "last" gives the value of the counter that is being decremented
|
||||
for the current grace period phase. In the example above,
|
||||
the counters sum to 4, indicating that there are still four
|
||||
RCU read-side critical sections still running that started
|
||||
before the last counter flip.
|
||||
|
||||
o "cur" gives the value of the counter that is currently being
|
||||
both incremented (by rcu_read_lock()) and decremented (by
|
||||
rcu_read_unlock()). In the example above, the counters sum to
|
||||
1, indicating that there is only one RCU read-side critical section
|
||||
still running that started after the last counter flip.
|
||||
|
||||
o "F" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to acknowledge
|
||||
a counter flip. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any,
|
||||
which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than
|
||||
"waitack".
|
||||
|
||||
o "M" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to execute a
|
||||
memory barrier. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any,
|
||||
which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than
|
||||
"waitmb".
|
||||
|
||||
o "ggp" is the global grace-period counter.
|
||||
|
||||
o "state" is the RCU state, which can be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
o "idle": there is no grace period in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
o "waitack": RCU just incremented the global grace-period
|
||||
counter, which has the effect of reversing the roles of
|
||||
the "last" and "cur" counters above, and is waiting for
|
||||
all the CPUs to acknowledge the flip. Once the flip has
|
||||
been acknowledged, CPUs will no longer be incrementing
|
||||
what are now the "last" counters, so that their sum will
|
||||
decrease monotonically down to zero.
|
||||
|
||||
o "waitzero": RCU is waiting for the sum of the "last" counters
|
||||
to decrease to zero.
|
||||
|
||||
o "waitmb": RCU is waiting for each CPU to execute a memory
|
||||
barrier, which ensures that instructions from a given CPU's
|
||||
last RCU read-side critical section cannot be reordered
|
||||
with instructions following the memory-barrier instruction.
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
oldggp=48870 newggp=48873
|
||||
|
||||
Note that reading from this file provokes a synchronize_rcu(). The
|
||||
"oldggp" value is that of "ggp" from rcu/rcuctrs above, taken before
|
||||
executing the synchronize_rcu(), and the "newggp" value is also the
|
||||
"ggp" value, but taken after the synchronize_rcu() command returns.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
na=1337955 nl=40 wa=1337915 wl=44 da=1337871 dl=0 dr=1337871 di=1337871
|
||||
1=50989 e1=6138 i1=49722 ie1=82 g1=49640 a1=315203 ae1=265563 a2=49640
|
||||
z1=1401244 ze1=1351605 z2=49639 m1=5661253 me1=5611614 m2=49639
|
||||
|
||||
These are counters tracking internal preemptable-RCU events, however,
|
||||
some of them may be useful for debugging algorithms using RCU. In
|
||||
particular, the "nl", "wl", and "dl" values track the number of RCU
|
||||
callbacks in various states. The fields are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
o "na" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been enqueued
|
||||
since boot.
|
||||
|
||||
o "nl" is the number of RCU callbacks waiting for the previous
|
||||
grace period to end so that they can start waiting on the next
|
||||
grace period.
|
||||
|
||||
o "wa" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have started waiting
|
||||
for a grace period since boot. "na" should be roughly equal to
|
||||
"nl" plus "wa".
|
||||
|
||||
o "wl" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting for their
|
||||
grace period to end.
|
||||
|
||||
o "da" is the total number of RCU callbacks whose grace periods
|
||||
have completed since boot. "wa" should be roughly equal to
|
||||
"wl" plus "da".
|
||||
|
||||
o "dr" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been removed
|
||||
from the list of callbacks ready to invoke. "dr" should be roughly
|
||||
equal to "da".
|
||||
|
||||
o "di" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked
|
||||
since boot. "di" should be roughly equal to "da", though some
|
||||
early versions of preemptable RCU had a bug so that only the
|
||||
last CPU's count of invocations was displayed, rather than the
|
||||
sum of all CPU's counts.
|
||||
|
||||
o "1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip(). This should be
|
||||
roughly equal to the sum of "e1", "i1", "a1", "z1", and "m1"
|
||||
described below. In other words, the number of times that
|
||||
the state machine is visited should be equal to the sum of the
|
||||
number of times that each state is visited plus the number of
|
||||
times that the state-machine lock acquisition failed.
|
||||
|
||||
o "e1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip() was unable to
|
||||
acquire the fliplock.
|
||||
|
||||
o "i1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_idle().
|
||||
|
||||
o "ie1" is the number of times rcu_try_flip_idle() exited early
|
||||
due to the calling CPU having no work for RCU.
|
||||
|
||||
o "g1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_idle() decided
|
||||
to start a new grace period. "i1" should be roughly equal to
|
||||
"ie1" plus "g1".
|
||||
|
||||
o "a1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack().
|
||||
|
||||
o "ae1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitack() found
|
||||
that at least one CPU had not yet acknowledge the new grace period
|
||||
(AKA "counter flip").
|
||||
|
||||
o "a2" is the number of time rcu_try_flip_waitack() found that
|
||||
all CPUs had acknowledged. "a1" should be roughly equal to
|
||||
"ae1" plus "a2". (This particular output was collected on
|
||||
a 128-CPU machine, hence the smaller-than-usual fraction of
|
||||
calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack() finding all CPUs having already
|
||||
acknowledged.)
|
||||
|
||||
o "z1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitzero().
|
||||
|
||||
o "ze1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() found
|
||||
that not all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had
|
||||
completed.
|
||||
|
||||
o "z2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() finds
|
||||
the sum of the counters equal to zero, in other words, that
|
||||
all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had completed.
|
||||
The value of "z1" should be roughly equal to "ze1" plus
|
||||
"z2".
|
||||
|
||||
o "m1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitmb().
|
||||
|
||||
o "me1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds
|
||||
that at least one CPU has not yet executed a memory barrier.
|
||||
|
||||
o "m2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds that
|
||||
all CPUs have executed a memory barrier.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats
|
||||
|
||||
This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the
|
||||
top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct
|
||||
rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and
|
||||
rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy).
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
rcu:
|
||||
0 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=1 rp=3c2a dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=1882 of=0 ri=2126 ql=2 b=10
|
||||
1 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=3 rp=39a6 dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=1402 of=0 ri=1875 ql=46 b=10
|
||||
2 c=4010 g=4010 pq=1 pqc=4010 qp=0 rpfq=-5 rp=1d12 dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2080 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
3 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=2b50 dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=2230 of=0 ri=1923 ql=72 b=10
|
||||
4 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1644 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=3348 of=0 ri=2805 ql=7 b=10
|
||||
5 c=4012 g=4013 pq=0 pqc=4011 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1aac dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2066 ql=10 b=10
|
||||
6 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=ed8 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=3797 of=0 ri=1266 ql=10 b=10
|
||||
7 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1fa2 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=2795 of=0 ri=2162 ql=28 b=10
|
||||
rcu_bh:
|
||||
0 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-145 rp=21d6 dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=0 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
1 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-170 rp=20ce dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=26 of=0 ri=5 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
2 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-83 rp=fbd dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=4 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
3 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-105 rp=178c dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=2 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
4 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-30 rp=b54 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
5 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-29 rp=df5 dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
6 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-28 rp=788 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
7 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-53 rp=1098 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10
|
||||
|
||||
The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu, the second for
|
||||
rcu_bh. Each section has one line per CPU, or eight for this 8-CPU system.
|
||||
The fields are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
o The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number.
|
||||
CPUs numbers followed by an exclamation mark are offline,
|
||||
but have been online at least once since boot. There will be
|
||||
no output for CPUs that have never been online, which can be
|
||||
a good thing in the surprisingly common case where NR_CPUS is
|
||||
substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs.
|
||||
|
||||
o "c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
|
||||
completed. CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag quite a ways
|
||||
behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu" above, which has slept
|
||||
through the past 25 RCU grace periods. It is not unusual to
|
||||
see CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods.
|
||||
|
||||
o "g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have
|
||||
started. Again, CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag behind.
|
||||
If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU has already
|
||||
reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace period that
|
||||
it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it owes RCU a
|
||||
quiescent state.
|
||||
|
||||
o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state
|
||||
for the current grace period. It is possible for "pq" to be
|
||||
"1" and "c" different than "g", which indicates that although
|
||||
the CPU has passed through a quiescent state, either (1) this
|
||||
CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not
|
||||
yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both.
|
||||
|
||||
o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent
|
||||
state for this CPU corresponds to. This is important for handling
|
||||
the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle
|
||||
quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and
|
||||
reporting its own quiescent state. If CPU 1 was the last CPU
|
||||
for the current grace period, then the CPU that loses this race
|
||||
will attempt to incorrectly mark CPU 1 as having checked in for
|
||||
the next grace period!
|
||||
|
||||
o "qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from
|
||||
this CPU.
|
||||
|
||||
o "rpfq" is the number of rcu_pending() calls on this CPU required
|
||||
to induce this CPU to invoke force_quiescent_state().
|
||||
|
||||
o "rp" is low-order four hex digits of the count of how many times
|
||||
rcu_pending() has been invoked on this CPU.
|
||||
|
||||
o "dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented
|
||||
when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the
|
||||
scheduler or by irq. The number after the "/" is the interrupt
|
||||
nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state, or one greater than
|
||||
the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
|
||||
|
||||
o "dn" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented
|
||||
when entering or leaving dynticks idle state via NMI. If both
|
||||
the "dt" and "dn" values are even, then this CPU is in dynticks
|
||||
idle mode and may be ignored by RCU. If either of these two
|
||||
counters is odd, then RCU must be alert to the possibility of
|
||||
an RCU read-side critical section running on this CPU.
|
||||
|
||||
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
|
||||
|
||||
o "df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
|
||||
quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being in
|
||||
dynticks-idle state.
|
||||
|
||||
This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels.
|
||||
|
||||
o "of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a
|
||||
quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being
|
||||
offline. In a perfect world, this might neve happen, but it
|
||||
turns out that offlining and onlining a CPU can take several grace
|
||||
periods, and so there is likely to be an extended period of time
|
||||
when RCU believes that the CPU is online when it really is not.
|
||||
Please note that erring in the other direction (RCU believing a
|
||||
CPU is offline when it is really alive and kicking) is a fatal
|
||||
error, so it makes sense to err conservatively.
|
||||
|
||||
o "ri" is the number of times that RCU has seen fit to send a
|
||||
reschedule IPI to this CPU in order to get it to report a
|
||||
quiescent state.
|
||||
|
||||
o "ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on
|
||||
this CPU. This is the total number of callbacks, regardless
|
||||
of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to
|
||||
start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke).
|
||||
|
||||
o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number
|
||||
of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will
|
||||
be deferred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
rcu: completed=33062 gpnum=33063
|
||||
rcu_bh: completed=464 gpnum=464
|
||||
|
||||
Again, this output is for both "rcu" and "rcu_bh". The fields are
|
||||
taken from the rcu_state structure, and are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
o "completed" is the number of grace periods that have completed.
|
||||
It is comparable to the "c" field from rcu/rcudata in that a
|
||||
CPU whose "c" field matches the value of "completed" is aware
|
||||
that the corresponding RCU grace period has completed.
|
||||
|
||||
o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is
|
||||
comparable to the "g" field from rcu/rcudata in that a CPU
|
||||
whose "g" field matches the value of "gpnum" is aware that the
|
||||
corresponding RCU grace period has started.
|
||||
|
||||
If these two fields are equal (as they are for "rcu_bh" above),
|
||||
then there is no grace period in progress, in other words, RCU
|
||||
is idle. On the other hand, if the two fields differ (as they
|
||||
do for "rcu" above), then an RCU grace period is in progress.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines:
|
||||
|
||||
c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6
|
||||
1/1 0:127 ^0
|
||||
3/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3
|
||||
3/3f 0:5 ^0 2/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3
|
||||
rcu_bh:
|
||||
c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0
|
||||
0/1 0:127 ^0
|
||||
0/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3
|
||||
0/3f 0:5 ^0 0/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3
|
||||
|
||||
This is once again split into "rcu" and "rcu_bh" portions. The fields are
|
||||
as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
o "c" is exactly the same as "completed" under rcu/rcugp.
|
||||
|
||||
o "g" is exactly the same as "gpnum" under rcu/rcugp.
|
||||
|
||||
o "s" is the "signaled" state that drives force_quiescent_state()'s
|
||||
state machine.
|
||||
|
||||
o "jfq" is the number of jiffies remaining for this grace period
|
||||
before force_quiescent_state() is invoked to help push things
|
||||
along. Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode thoughout the grace
|
||||
period will not report on their own, but rather must be check by
|
||||
some other CPU via force_quiescent_state().
|
||||
|
||||
o "j" is the low-order four hex digits of the jiffies counter.
|
||||
Yes, Paul did run into a number of problems that turned out to
|
||||
be due to the jiffies counter no longer counting. Why do you ask?
|
||||
|
||||
o "nfqs" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() since
|
||||
boot.
|
||||
|
||||
o "nfqsng" is the number of useless calls to force_quiescent_state(),
|
||||
where there wasn't actually a grace period active. This can
|
||||
happen due to races. The number in parentheses is the difference
|
||||
between "nfqs" and "nfqsng", or the number of times that
|
||||
force_quiescent_state() actually did some real work.
|
||||
|
||||
o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that
|
||||
exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above)
|
||||
due to contention on ->fqslock.
|
||||
|
||||
o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
|
||||
rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from
|
||||
root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures
|
||||
as forming yet another level after the leaves. Note that there
|
||||
might be either one, two, or three levels of rcu_node structures,
|
||||
depending on the relationship between CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT and
|
||||
CONFIG_NR_CPUS.
|
||||
|
||||
o The numbers separated by the "/" are the qsmask followed
|
||||
by the qsmaskinit. The qsmask will have one bit
|
||||
set for each entity in the next lower level that
|
||||
has not yet checked in for the current grace period.
|
||||
The qsmaskinit will have one bit for each entity that is
|
||||
currently expected to check in during each grace period.
|
||||
The value of qsmaskinit is assigned to that of qsmask
|
||||
at the beginning of each grace period.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, for "rcu", the qsmask of the first entry
|
||||
of the lowest level is 0x14, meaning that we are still
|
||||
waiting for CPUs 2 and 4 to check in for the current
|
||||
grace period.
|
||||
|
||||
o The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs
|
||||
served by this struct rcu_node. This can be helpful
|
||||
in working out how the hierarchy is wired together.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
|
||||
"0:5", indicating that it covers CPUs 0 through 5.
|
||||
|
||||
o The number after the "^" indicates the bit in the
|
||||
next higher level rcu_node structure that this
|
||||
rcu_node structure corresponds to.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows
|
||||
"^0", indicating that it corresponds to bit zero in
|
||||
the first entry at the middle level.
|
@ -392,6 +392,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
||||
goto err;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (!maskset && !tid && !containerset) {
|
||||
usage();
|
||||
goto err;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
do {
|
||||
int i;
|
||||
|
286
Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
Normal file
286
Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
|
||||
MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
|
||||
|
||||
Eric Miao <eric.miao@marvell.com>
|
||||
|
||||
MFP stands for Multi-Function Pin, which is the pin-mux logic on PXA3xx and
|
||||
later PXA series processors. This document describes the existing MFP API,
|
||||
and how board/platform driver authors could make use of it.
|
||||
|
||||
Basic Concept
|
||||
===============
|
||||
|
||||
Unlike the GPIO alternate function settings on PXA25x and PXA27x, a new MFP
|
||||
mechanism is introduced from PXA3xx to completely move the pin-mux functions
|
||||
out of the GPIO controller. In addition to pin-mux configurations, the MFP
|
||||
also controls the low power state, driving strength, pull-up/down and event
|
||||
detection of each pin. Below is a diagram of internal connections between
|
||||
the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals:
|
||||
|
||||
+--------+
|
||||
| |--(GPIO19)--+
|
||||
| GPIO | |
|
||||
| |--(GPIO...) |
|
||||
+--------+ |
|
||||
| +---------+
|
||||
+--------+ +------>| |
|
||||
| PWM2 |--(PWM_OUT)-------->| MFP |
|
||||
+--------+ +------>| |-------> to external PAD
|
||||
| +---->| |
|
||||
+--------+ | | +-->| |
|
||||
| SSP2 |---(TXD)----+ | | +---------+
|
||||
+--------+ | |
|
||||
| |
|
||||
+--------+ | |
|
||||
| Keypad |--(MKOUT4)----+ |
|
||||
+--------+ |
|
||||
|
|
||||
+--------+ |
|
||||
| UART2 |---(TXD)--------+
|
||||
+--------+
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: the external pad is named as MFP_PIN_GPIO19, it doesn't necessarily
|
||||
mean it's dedicated for GPIO19, only as a hint that internally this pin
|
||||
can be routed from GPIO19 of the GPIO controller.
|
||||
|
||||
To better understand the change from PXA25x/PXA27x GPIO alternate function
|
||||
to this new MFP mechanism, here are several key points:
|
||||
|
||||
1. GPIO controller on PXA3xx is now a dedicated controller, same as other
|
||||
internal controllers like PWM, SSP and UART, with 128 internal signals
|
||||
which can be routed to external through one or more MFPs (e.g. GPIO<0>
|
||||
can be routed through either MFP_PIN_GPIO0 as well as MFP_PIN_GPIO0_2,
|
||||
see arch/arm/mach-pxa/mach/include/mfp-pxa300.h)
|
||||
|
||||
2. Alternate function configuration is removed from this GPIO controller,
|
||||
the remaining functions are pure GPIO-specific, i.e.
|
||||
|
||||
- GPIO signal level control
|
||||
- GPIO direction control
|
||||
- GPIO level change detection
|
||||
|
||||
3. Low power state for each pin is now controlled by MFP, this means the
|
||||
PGSRx registers on PXA2xx are now useless on PXA3xx
|
||||
|
||||
4. Wakeup detection is now controlled by MFP, PWER does not control the
|
||||
wakeup from GPIO(s) any more, depending on the sleeping state, ADxER
|
||||
(as defined in pxa3xx-regs.h) controls the wakeup from MFP
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: with such a clear separation of MFP and GPIO, by GPIO<xx> we normally
|
||||
mean it is a GPIO signal, and by MFP<xxx> or pin xxx, we mean a physical
|
||||
pad (or ball).
|
||||
|
||||
MFP API Usage
|
||||
===============
|
||||
|
||||
For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
|
||||
|
||||
1. include ONE of the following header files in your <board>.c:
|
||||
|
||||
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa25x.h>
|
||||
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa27x.h>
|
||||
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa300.h>
|
||||
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa320.h>
|
||||
- #include <mach/mfp-pxa930.h>
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: only one file in your <board>.c, depending on the processors used,
|
||||
because pin configuration definitions may conflict in these file (i.e.
|
||||
same name, different meaning and settings on different processors). E.g.
|
||||
for zylonite platform, which support both PXA300/PXA310 and PXA320, two
|
||||
separate files are introduced: zylonite_pxa300.c and zylonite_pxa320.c
|
||||
(in addition to handle MFP configuration differences, they also handle
|
||||
the other differences between the two combinations).
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: PXA300 and PXA310 are almost identical in pin configurations (with
|
||||
PXA310 supporting some additional ones), thus the difference is actually
|
||||
covered in a single mfp-pxa300.h.
|
||||
|
||||
2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.:
|
||||
|
||||
static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
|
||||
/* Chip Select */
|
||||
GPIO15_nCS_1,
|
||||
|
||||
/* LCD - 16bpp Active TFT */
|
||||
GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP,
|
||||
GPIO16_PWM0_OUT, /* Backlight */
|
||||
|
||||
/* MMC */
|
||||
GPIO32_MMC_CLK,
|
||||
GPIO112_MMC_CMD,
|
||||
GPIO92_MMC_DAT_0,
|
||||
GPIO109_MMC_DAT_1,
|
||||
GPIO110_MMC_DAT_2,
|
||||
GPIO111_MMC_DAT_3,
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
/* GPIO */
|
||||
GPIO1_GPIO | WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH,
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
a) once the pin configurations are passed to pxa{2xx,3xx}_mfp_config(),
|
||||
and written to the actual registers, they are useless and may discard,
|
||||
adding '__initdata' will help save some additional bytes here.
|
||||
|
||||
b) when there is only one possible pin configurations for a component,
|
||||
some simplified definitions can be used, e.g. GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP on
|
||||
PXA25x and PXA27x processors
|
||||
|
||||
c) if by board design, a pin can be configured to wake up the system
|
||||
from low power state, it can be 'OR'ed with any of:
|
||||
|
||||
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH
|
||||
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_RISE
|
||||
WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_FALL
|
||||
WAKEUP_ON_LEVEL_HIGH - specifically for enabling of keypad GPIOs,
|
||||
|
||||
to indicate that this pin has the capability of wake-up the system,
|
||||
and on which edge(s). This, however, doesn't necessarily mean the
|
||||
pin _will_ wakeup the system, it will only when set_irq_wake() is
|
||||
invoked with the corresponding GPIO IRQ (GPIO_IRQ(xx) or gpio_to_irq())
|
||||
and eventually calls gpio_set_wake() for the actual register setting.
|
||||
|
||||
d) although PXA3xx MFP supports edge detection on each pin, the
|
||||
internal logic will only wakeup the system when those specific bits
|
||||
in ADxER registers are set, which can be well mapped to the
|
||||
corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
|
||||
the peripheral IRQ to enable the wakeup.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MFP on PXA3xx
|
||||
===============
|
||||
|
||||
Every external I/O pad on PXA3xx (excluding those for special purpose) has
|
||||
one MFP logic associated, and is controlled by one MFP register (MFPR).
|
||||
|
||||
The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
|
||||
|
||||
31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
|
||||
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
|
||||
| RESERVED |PS|PU|PD| DRIVE |SS|SD|SO|EC|EF|ER|--| AF_SEL |
|
||||
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
|
||||
|
||||
Bit 3: RESERVED
|
||||
Bit 4: EDGE_RISE_EN - enable detection of rising edge on this pin
|
||||
Bit 5: EDGE_FALL_EN - enable detection of falling edge on this pin
|
||||
Bit 6: EDGE_CLEAR - disable edge detection on this pin
|
||||
Bit 7: SLEEP_OE_N - enable outputs during low power modes
|
||||
Bit 8: SLEEP_DATA - output data on the pin during low power modes
|
||||
Bit 9: SLEEP_SEL - selection control for low power modes signals
|
||||
Bit 13: PULLDOWN_EN - enable the internal pull-down resistor on this pin
|
||||
Bit 14: PULLUP_EN - enable the internal pull-up resistor on this pin
|
||||
Bit 15: PULL_SEL - pull state controlled by selected alternate function
|
||||
(0) or by PULL{UP,DOWN}_EN bits (1)
|
||||
|
||||
Bit 0 - 2: AF_SEL - alternate function selection, 8 possibilities, from 0-7
|
||||
Bit 10-12: DRIVE - drive strength and slew rate
|
||||
0b000 - fast 1mA
|
||||
0b001 - fast 2mA
|
||||
0b002 - fast 3mA
|
||||
0b003 - fast 4mA
|
||||
0b004 - slow 6mA
|
||||
0b005 - fast 6mA
|
||||
0b006 - slow 10mA
|
||||
0b007 - fast 10mA
|
||||
|
||||
MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
|
||||
==============================
|
||||
|
||||
Due to the difference of pin-mux handling between PXA2xx and PXA3xx, a unified
|
||||
MFP API is introduced to cover both series of processors.
|
||||
|
||||
The basic idea of this design is to introduce definitions for all possible pin
|
||||
configurations, these definitions are processor and platform independent, and
|
||||
the actual API invoked to convert these definitions into register settings and
|
||||
make them effective there-after.
|
||||
|
||||
Files Involved
|
||||
--------------
|
||||
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp.h
|
||||
|
||||
for
|
||||
1. Unified pin definitions - enum constants for all configurable pins
|
||||
2. processor-neutral bit definitions for a possible MFP configuration
|
||||
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa3xx.h
|
||||
|
||||
for PXA3xx specific MFPR register bit definitions and PXA3xx common pin
|
||||
configurations
|
||||
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa2xx.h
|
||||
|
||||
for PXA2xx specific definitions and PXA25x/PXA27x common pin configurations
|
||||
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa25x.h
|
||||
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa27x.h
|
||||
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa300.h
|
||||
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa320.h
|
||||
arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa930.h
|
||||
|
||||
for processor specific definitions
|
||||
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa3xx.c
|
||||
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa2xx.c
|
||||
|
||||
for implementation of the pin configuration to take effect for the actual
|
||||
processor.
|
||||
|
||||
Pin Configuration
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
|
||||
The following comments are copied from mfp.h (see the actual source code
|
||||
for most updated info)
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
|
||||
*
|
||||
* bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
|
||||
* bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
|
||||
* bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
|
||||
* bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
|
||||
* bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
|
||||
* bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
|
||||
*
|
||||
* to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
|
||||
*
|
||||
* MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
|
||||
* alternate function = 0,
|
||||
* drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
|
||||
* low power mode = default
|
||||
* edge detection = none
|
||||
*
|
||||
* MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
|
||||
* MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
|
||||
* pin drive strength
|
||||
* MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
|
||||
* low power mode
|
||||
* MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
|
||||
* pin drive strength and low power mode
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
Examples of pin configurations are:
|
||||
|
||||
#define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
|
||||
|
||||
which reads GPIO94 can be configured as SSP3_RXD, with alternate function
|
||||
selection of 1, driving strength of 0b101, and a float state in low power
|
||||
modes.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: this is the default setting of this pin being configured as SSP3_RXD
|
||||
which can be modified a bit in board code, though it is not recommended to
|
||||
do so, simply because this default setting is usually carefully encoded,
|
||||
and is supposed to work in most cases.
|
||||
|
||||
Register Settings
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
|
||||
Register settings on PXA3xx for a pin configuration is actually very
|
||||
straight-forward, most bits can be converted directly into MFPR value
|
||||
in a easier way. Two sets of MFPR values are calculated: the run-time
|
||||
ones and the low power mode ones, to allow different settings.
|
||||
|
||||
The conversion from a generic pin configuration to the actual register
|
||||
settings on PXA2xx is a bit complicated: many registers are involved,
|
||||
including GAFRx, GPDRx, PGSRx, PWER, PKWR, PFER and PRER. Please see
|
||||
mfp-pxa2xx.c for how the conversion is made.
|
45
Documentation/bad_memory.txt
Normal file
45
Documentation/bad_memory.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
|
||||
March 2008
|
||||
Jan-Simon Moeller, dl9pf@gmx.de
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
How to deal with bad memory e.g. reported by memtest86+ ?
|
||||
#########################################################
|
||||
|
||||
There are three possibilities I know of:
|
||||
|
||||
1) Reinsert/swap the memory modules
|
||||
|
||||
2) Buy new modules (best!) or try to exchange the memory
|
||||
if you have spare-parts
|
||||
|
||||
3) Use BadRAM or memmap
|
||||
|
||||
This Howto is about number 3) .
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BadRAM
|
||||
######
|
||||
BadRAM is the actively developed and available as kernel-patch
|
||||
here: http://rick.vanrein.org/linux/badram/
|
||||
|
||||
For more details see the BadRAM documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
memmap
|
||||
######
|
||||
|
||||
memmap is already in the kernel and usable as kernel-parameter at
|
||||
boot-time. Its syntax is slightly strange and you may need to
|
||||
calculate the values by yourself!
|
||||
|
||||
Syntax to exclude a memory area (see kernel-parameters.txt for details):
|
||||
memmap=<size>$<address>
|
||||
|
||||
Example: memtest86+ reported here errors at address 0x18691458, 0x18698424 and
|
||||
some others. All had 0x1869xxxx in common, so I chose a pattern of
|
||||
0x18690000,0xffff0000.
|
||||
|
||||
With the numbers of the example above:
|
||||
memmap=64K$0x18690000
|
||||
or
|
||||
memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
|
||||
|
@ -9,3 +9,6 @@ cachefeatures.txt
|
||||
|
||||
Filesystems
|
||||
- Requirements for mounting the root file system.
|
||||
|
||||
bfin-gpio-note.txt
|
||||
- Notes in developing/using bfin-gpio driver.
|
||||
|
71
Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
Normal file
71
Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-note.txt
|
||||
* Based on:
|
||||
* Author:
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Created: $Id: bfin-gpio-note.txt 2008-11-24 16:42 grafyang $
|
||||
* Description: This file contains the notes in developing/using bfin-gpio.
|
||||
*
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Rev:
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Modified:
|
||||
* Copyright 2004-2008 Analog Devices Inc.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Bugs: Enter bugs at http://blackfin.uclinux.org/
|
||||
*
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1. Blackfin GPIO introduction
|
||||
|
||||
There are many GPIO pins on Blackfin. Most of these pins are muxed to
|
||||
multi-functions. They can be configured as peripheral, or just as GPIO,
|
||||
configured to input with interrupt enabled, or output.
|
||||
|
||||
For detailed information, please see "arch/blackfin/kernel/bfin_gpio.c",
|
||||
or the relevant HRM.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2. Avoiding resource conflict
|
||||
|
||||
Followed function groups are used to avoiding resource conflict,
|
||||
- Use the pin as peripheral,
|
||||
int peripheral_request(unsigned short per, const char *label);
|
||||
int peripheral_request_list(const unsigned short per[], const char *label);
|
||||
void peripheral_free(unsigned short per);
|
||||
void peripheral_free_list(const unsigned short per[]);
|
||||
- Use the pin as GPIO,
|
||||
int bfin_gpio_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label);
|
||||
void bfin_gpio_free(unsigned gpio);
|
||||
- Use the pin as GPIO interrupt,
|
||||
int bfin_gpio_irq_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label);
|
||||
void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio);
|
||||
|
||||
The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin,
|
||||
the free functions will clear it's function state.
|
||||
Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by
|
||||
previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request
|
||||
function fail.
|
||||
These functions are wrapped by other functions, most of the users need not
|
||||
care.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3. But there are some exceptions
|
||||
- Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested both as GPIO and GPIO
|
||||
interrut.
|
||||
Some drivers, like gpio-keys, need this behavior. Kernel only print out
|
||||
warning messages like,
|
||||
bfin-gpio: GPIO 24 is already reserved by gpio-keys: BTN0, and you are
|
||||
configuring it as IRQ!
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Consider the case that, if there are two drivers need the
|
||||
identical GPIO, one of them use it as GPIO, the other use it as
|
||||
GPIO interrupt. This will really cause resource conflict. So if
|
||||
there is any abnormal driver behavior, please check the bfin-gpio
|
||||
warning messages.
|
||||
|
||||
- Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested from the same driver twice.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ I/O scheduler, a.k.a. elevator, is implemented in two layers. Generic dispatch
|
||||
queue and specific I/O schedulers. Unless stated otherwise, elevator is used
|
||||
to refer to both parts and I/O scheduler to specific I/O schedulers.
|
||||
|
||||
Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in ll_rw_blk.c and elevator.c.
|
||||
Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in block/*.c.
|
||||
The generic dispatch queue is responsible for properly ordering barrier
|
||||
requests, requeueing, handling non-fs requests and all other subtleties.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -926,8 +926,8 @@ be built inside the kernel. Each queue can choose different one and can also
|
||||
change to another one dynamically.
|
||||
|
||||
A block layer call to the i/o scheduler follows the convention elv_xxx(). This
|
||||
calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (drivers/block/elevator.c). Oh,
|
||||
xxx and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator
|
||||
calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (block/elevator.c). Oh, xxx
|
||||
and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator
|
||||
doesn't implement a function, the switch does nothing or some minimal house
|
||||
keeping work.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
|
||||
CGROUPS
|
||||
-------
|
||||
|
||||
Written by Paul Menage <menage@google.com> based on Documentation/cpusets.txt
|
||||
Written by Paul Menage <menage@google.com> based on
|
||||
Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
|
||||
|
||||
Original copyright statements from cpusets.txt:
|
||||
Portions Copyright (C) 2004 BULL SA.
|
||||
@ -68,7 +69,7 @@ On their own, the only use for cgroups is for simple job
|
||||
tracking. The intention is that other subsystems hook into the generic
|
||||
cgroup support to provide new attributes for cgroups, such as
|
||||
accounting/limiting the resources which processes in a cgroup can
|
||||
access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cpusets.txt) allows
|
||||
access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt) allows
|
||||
you to associate a set of CPUs and a set of memory nodes with the
|
||||
tasks in each cgroup.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -227,7 +228,6 @@ Each cgroup is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system
|
||||
containing the following files describing that cgroup:
|
||||
|
||||
- tasks: list of tasks (by pid) attached to that cgroup
|
||||
- releasable flag: cgroup currently removeable?
|
||||
- notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit?
|
||||
- release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file
|
||||
exists in the top cgroup only)
|
||||
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Now you want to do something with this cgroup.
|
||||
|
||||
In this directory you can find several files:
|
||||
# ls
|
||||
notify_on_release releasable tasks
|
||||
notify_on_release tasks
|
||||
(plus whatever files added by the attached subsystems)
|
||||
|
||||
Now attach your shell to this cgroup:
|
||||
@ -479,7 +479,6 @@ newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this subsystem's
|
||||
create() method has been called for the new cgroup).
|
||||
|
||||
void pre_destroy(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp);
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
|
||||
Called before checking the reference count on each subsystem. This may
|
||||
be useful for subsystems which have some extra references even if
|
||||
@ -498,6 +497,7 @@ remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex.
|
||||
|
||||
void attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
|
||||
struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task)
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
|
||||
Called after the task has been attached to the cgroup, to allow any
|
||||
post-attachment activity that requires memory allocations or blocking.
|
||||
@ -511,6 +511,7 @@ void exit(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct task_struct *task)
|
||||
Called during task exit.
|
||||
|
||||
int populate(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp)
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
|
||||
Called after creation of a cgroup to allow a subsystem to populate
|
||||
the cgroup directory with file entries. The subsystem should make
|
||||
@ -520,6 +521,7 @@ method can return an error code, the error code is currently not
|
||||
always handled well.
|
||||
|
||||
void post_clone(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp)
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
|
||||
Called at the end of cgroup_clone() to do any paramater
|
||||
initialization which might be required before a task could attach. For
|
||||
@ -527,7 +529,7 @@ example in cpusets, no task may attach before 'cpus' and 'mems' are set
|
||||
up.
|
||||
|
||||
void bind(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *root)
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
(cgroup_mutex and ss->hierarchy_mutex held by caller)
|
||||
|
||||
Called when a cgroup subsystem is rebound to a different hierarchy
|
||||
and root cgroup. Currently this will only involve movement between
|
||||
|
32
Documentation/cgroups/cpuacct.txt
Normal file
32
Documentation/cgroups/cpuacct.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
|
||||
CPU Accounting Controller
|
||||
-------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
The CPU accounting controller is used to group tasks using cgroups and
|
||||
account the CPU usage of these groups of tasks.
|
||||
|
||||
The CPU accounting controller supports multi-hierarchy groups. An accounting
|
||||
group accumulates the CPU usage of all of its child groups and the tasks
|
||||
directly present in its group.
|
||||
|
||||
Accounting groups can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem.
|
||||
|
||||
# mkdir /cgroups
|
||||
# mount -t cgroup -ocpuacct none /cgroups
|
||||
|
||||
With the above step, the initial or the parent accounting group
|
||||
becomes visible at /cgroups. At bootup, this group includes all the
|
||||
tasks in the system. /cgroups/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup.
|
||||
/cgroups/cpuacct.usage gives the CPU time (in nanoseconds) obtained by
|
||||
this group which is essentially the CPU time obtained by all the tasks
|
||||
in the system.
|
||||
|
||||
New accounting groups can be created under the parent group /cgroups.
|
||||
|
||||
# cd /cgroups
|
||||
# mkdir g1
|
||||
# echo $$ > g1
|
||||
|
||||
The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell
|
||||
process (bash) into it. CPU time consumed by this bash and its children
|
||||
can be obtained from g1/cpuacct.usage and the same is accumulated in
|
||||
/cgroups/cpuacct.usage also.
|
342
Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
Normal file
342
Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
|
||||
Memory Resource Controller(Memcg) Implementation Memo.
|
||||
Last Updated: 2008/12/15
|
||||
Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.28-rc8-mm.
|
||||
|
||||
Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior
|
||||
is complex. This is a document for memcg's internal behavior.
|
||||
Please note that implementation details can be changed.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Topics on API should be in Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt)
|
||||
|
||||
0. How to record usage ?
|
||||
2 objects are used.
|
||||
|
||||
page_cgroup ....an object per page.
|
||||
Allocated at boot or memory hotplug. Freed at memory hot removal.
|
||||
|
||||
swap_cgroup ... an entry per swp_entry.
|
||||
Allocated at swapon(). Freed at swapoff().
|
||||
|
||||
The page_cgroup has USED bit and double count against a page_cgroup never
|
||||
occurs. swap_cgroup is used only when a charged page is swapped-out.
|
||||
|
||||
1. Charge
|
||||
|
||||
a page/swp_entry may be charged (usage += PAGE_SIZE) at
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_newpage_charge()
|
||||
Called at new page fault and Copy-On-Write.
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_try_charge_swapin()
|
||||
Called at do_swap_page() (page fault on swap entry) and swapoff.
|
||||
Followed by charge-commit-cancel protocol. (With swap accounting)
|
||||
At commit, a charge recorded in swap_cgroup is removed.
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_cache_charge()
|
||||
Called at add_to_page_cache()
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_cache_charge_swapin()
|
||||
Called at shmem's swapin.
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_prepare_migration()
|
||||
Called before migration. "extra" charge is done and followed by
|
||||
charge-commit-cancel protocol.
|
||||
At commit, charge against oldpage or newpage will be committed.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Uncharge
|
||||
a page/swp_entry may be uncharged (usage -= PAGE_SIZE) by
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_uncharge_page()
|
||||
Called when an anonymous page is fully unmapped. I.e., mapcount goes
|
||||
to 0. If the page is SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until
|
||||
mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache().
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_uncharge_cache_page()
|
||||
Called when a page-cache is deleted from radix-tree. If the page is
|
||||
SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache().
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache()
|
||||
Called when SwapCache is removed from radix-tree. The charge itself
|
||||
is moved to swap_cgroup. (If mem+swap controller is disabled, no
|
||||
charge to swap occurs.)
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_uncharge_swap()
|
||||
Called when swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0. A charge against swap
|
||||
disappears.
|
||||
|
||||
mem_cgroup_end_migration(old, new)
|
||||
At success of migration old is uncharged (if necessary), a charge
|
||||
to new page is committed. At failure, charge to old page is committed.
|
||||
|
||||
3. charge-commit-cancel
|
||||
In some case, we can't know this "charge" is valid or not at charging
|
||||
(because of races).
|
||||
To handle such case, there are charge-commit-cancel functions.
|
||||
mem_cgroup_try_charge_XXX
|
||||
mem_cgroup_commit_charge_XXX
|
||||
mem_cgroup_cancel_charge_XXX
|
||||
these are used in swap-in and migration.
|
||||
|
||||
At try_charge(), there are no flags to say "this page is charged".
|
||||
at this point, usage += PAGE_SIZE.
|
||||
|
||||
At commit(), the function checks the page should be charged or not
|
||||
and set flags or avoid charging.(usage -= PAGE_SIZE)
|
||||
|
||||
At cancel(), simply usage -= PAGE_SIZE.
|
||||
|
||||
Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
|
||||
|
||||
4. Anonymous
|
||||
Anonymous page is newly allocated at
|
||||
- page fault into MAP_ANONYMOUS mapping.
|
||||
- Copy-On-Write.
|
||||
It is charged right after it's allocated before doing any page table
|
||||
related operations. Of course, it's uncharged when another page is used
|
||||
for the fault address.
|
||||
|
||||
At freeing anonymous page (by exit() or munmap()), zap_pte() is called
|
||||
and pages for ptes are freed one by one.(see mm/memory.c). Uncharges
|
||||
are done at page_remove_rmap() when page_mapcount() goes down to 0.
|
||||
|
||||
Another page freeing is by page-reclaim (vmscan.c) and anonymous
|
||||
pages are swapped out. In this case, the page is marked as
|
||||
PageSwapCache(). uncharge() routine doesn't uncharge the page marked
|
||||
as SwapCache(). It's delayed until __delete_from_swap_cache().
|
||||
|
||||
4.1 Swap-in.
|
||||
At swap-in, the page is taken from swap-cache. There are 2 cases.
|
||||
|
||||
(a) If the SwapCache is newly allocated and read, it has no charges.
|
||||
(b) If the SwapCache has been mapped by processes, it has been
|
||||
charged already.
|
||||
|
||||
This swap-in is one of the most complicated work. In do_swap_page(),
|
||||
following events occur when pte is unchanged.
|
||||
|
||||
(1) the page (SwapCache) is looked up.
|
||||
(2) lock_page()
|
||||
(3) try_charge_swapin()
|
||||
(4) reuse_swap_page() (may call delete_swap_cache())
|
||||
(5) commit_charge_swapin()
|
||||
(6) swap_free().
|
||||
|
||||
Considering following situation for example.
|
||||
|
||||
(A) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page()
|
||||
doesn't call delete_from_swap_cache().
|
||||
(B) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page()
|
||||
calls delete_from_swap_cache().
|
||||
(C) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() doesn't
|
||||
call delete_from_swap_cache().
|
||||
(D) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() calls
|
||||
delete_from_swap_cache().
|
||||
|
||||
memory.usage/memsw.usage changes to this page/swp_entry will be
|
||||
Case (A) (B) (C) (D)
|
||||
Event
|
||||
Before (2) 0/ 1 0/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1
|
||||
===========================================
|
||||
(3) +1/+1 +1/+1 +1/+1 +1/+1
|
||||
(4) - 0/ 0 - -1/ 0
|
||||
(5) 0/-1 0/ 0 -1/-1 0/ 0
|
||||
(6) - 0/-1 - 0/-1
|
||||
===========================================
|
||||
Result 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1
|
||||
|
||||
In any cases, charges to this page should be 1/ 1.
|
||||
|
||||
4.2 Swap-out.
|
||||
At swap-out, typical state transition is below.
|
||||
|
||||
(a) add to swap cache. (marked as SwapCache)
|
||||
swp_entry's refcnt += 1.
|
||||
(b) fully unmapped.
|
||||
swp_entry's refcnt += # of ptes.
|
||||
(c) write back to swap.
|
||||
(d) delete from swap cache. (remove from SwapCache)
|
||||
swp_entry's refcnt -= 1.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
At (b), the page is marked as SwapCache and not uncharged.
|
||||
At (d), the page is removed from SwapCache and a charge in page_cgroup
|
||||
is moved to swap_cgroup.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, at task exit,
|
||||
(e) zap_pte() is called and swp_entry's refcnt -=1 -> 0.
|
||||
Here, a charge in swap_cgroup disappears.
|
||||
|
||||
5. Page Cache
|
||||
Page Cache is charged at
|
||||
- add_to_page_cache_locked().
|
||||
|
||||
uncharged at
|
||||
- __remove_from_page_cache().
|
||||
|
||||
The logic is very clear. (About migration, see below)
|
||||
Note: __remove_from_page_cache() is called by remove_from_page_cache()
|
||||
and __remove_mapping().
|
||||
|
||||
6. Shmem(tmpfs) Page Cache
|
||||
Memcg's charge/uncharge have special handlers of shmem. The best way
|
||||
to understand shmem's page state transition is to read mm/shmem.c.
|
||||
But brief explanation of the behavior of memcg around shmem will be
|
||||
helpful to understand the logic.
|
||||
|
||||
Shmem's page (just leaf page, not direct/indirect block) can be on
|
||||
- radix-tree of shmem's inode.
|
||||
- SwapCache.
|
||||
- Both on radix-tree and SwapCache. This happens at swap-in
|
||||
and swap-out,
|
||||
|
||||
It's charged when...
|
||||
- A new page is added to shmem's radix-tree.
|
||||
- A swp page is read. (move a charge from swap_cgroup to page_cgroup)
|
||||
It's uncharged when
|
||||
- A page is removed from radix-tree and not SwapCache.
|
||||
- When SwapCache is removed, a charge is moved to swap_cgroup.
|
||||
- When swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0, a charge in swap_cgroup
|
||||
disappears.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Page Migration
|
||||
One of the most complicated functions is page-migration-handler.
|
||||
Memcg has 2 routines. Assume that we are migrating a page's contents
|
||||
from OLDPAGE to NEWPAGE.
|
||||
|
||||
Usual migration logic is..
|
||||
(a) remove the page from LRU.
|
||||
(b) allocate NEWPAGE (migration target)
|
||||
(c) lock by lock_page().
|
||||
(d) unmap all mappings.
|
||||
(e-1) If necessary, replace entry in radix-tree.
|
||||
(e-2) move contents of a page.
|
||||
(f) map all mappings again.
|
||||
(g) pushback the page to LRU.
|
||||
(-) OLDPAGE will be freed.
|
||||
|
||||
Before (g), memcg should complete all necessary charge/uncharge to
|
||||
NEWPAGE/OLDPAGE.
|
||||
|
||||
The point is....
|
||||
- If OLDPAGE is anonymous, all charges will be dropped at (d) because
|
||||
try_to_unmap() drops all mapcount and the page will not be
|
||||
SwapCache.
|
||||
|
||||
- If OLDPAGE is SwapCache, charges will be kept at (g) because
|
||||
__delete_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1)
|
||||
|
||||
- If OLDPAGE is page-cache, charges will be kept at (g) because
|
||||
remove_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1)
|
||||
|
||||
memcg provides following hooks.
|
||||
|
||||
- mem_cgroup_prepare_migration(OLDPAGE)
|
||||
Called after (b) to account a charge (usage += PAGE_SIZE) against
|
||||
memcg which OLDPAGE belongs to.
|
||||
|
||||
- mem_cgroup_end_migration(OLDPAGE, NEWPAGE)
|
||||
Called after (f) before (g).
|
||||
If OLDPAGE is used, commit OLDPAGE again. If OLDPAGE is already
|
||||
charged, a charge by prepare_migration() is automatically canceled.
|
||||
If NEWPAGE is used, commit NEWPAGE and uncharge OLDPAGE.
|
||||
|
||||
But zap_pte() (by exit or munmap) can be called while migration,
|
||||
we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit().
|
||||
|
||||
8. LRU
|
||||
Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, it's handling is under global
|
||||
VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock).
|
||||
Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
|
||||
list management functions under zone->lru_lock().
|
||||
|
||||
A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans
|
||||
memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page
|
||||
from LRU.
|
||||
(By __isolate_lru_page(), the page is removed from both of global and
|
||||
private LRU.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
9. Typical Tests.
|
||||
|
||||
Tests for racy cases.
|
||||
|
||||
9.1 Small limit to memcg.
|
||||
When you do test to do racy case, it's good test to set memcg's limit
|
||||
to be very small rather than GB. Many races found in the test under
|
||||
xKB or xxMB limits.
|
||||
(Memory behavior under GB and Memory behavior under MB shows very
|
||||
different situation.)
|
||||
|
||||
9.2 Shmem
|
||||
Historically, memcg's shmem handling was poor and we saw some amount
|
||||
of troubles here. This is because shmem is page-cache but can be
|
||||
SwapCache. Test with shmem/tmpfs is always good test.
|
||||
|
||||
9.3 Migration
|
||||
For NUMA, migration is an another special case. To do easy test, cpuset
|
||||
is useful. Following is a sample script to do migration.
|
||||
|
||||
mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /opt/cpuset
|
||||
|
||||
mkdir /opt/cpuset/01
|
||||
echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.cpus
|
||||
echo 0 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.mems
|
||||
echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.memory_migrate
|
||||
mkdir /opt/cpuset/02
|
||||
echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.cpus
|
||||
echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.mems
|
||||
echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.memory_migrate
|
||||
|
||||
In above set, when you moves a task from 01 to 02, page migration to
|
||||
node 0 to node 1 will occur. Following is a script to migrate all
|
||||
under cpuset.
|
||||
--
|
||||
move_task()
|
||||
{
|
||||
for pid in $1
|
||||
do
|
||||
/bin/echo $pid >$2/tasks 2>/dev/null
|
||||
echo -n $pid
|
||||
echo -n " "
|
||||
done
|
||||
echo END
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
G1_TASK=`cat ${G1}/tasks`
|
||||
G2_TASK=`cat ${G2}/tasks`
|
||||
move_task "${G1_TASK}" ${G2} &
|
||||
--
|
||||
9.4 Memory hotplug.
|
||||
memory hotplug test is one of good test.
|
||||
to offline memory, do following.
|
||||
# echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
|
||||
(XXX is the place of memory)
|
||||
This is an easy way to test page migration, too.
|
||||
|
||||
9.5 mkdir/rmdir
|
||||
When using hierarchy, mkdir/rmdir test should be done.
|
||||
Use tests like the following.
|
||||
|
||||
echo 1 >/opt/cgroup/01/memory/use_hierarchy
|
||||
mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_a
|
||||
mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_b
|
||||
|
||||
set limit to 01.
|
||||
add limit to 01/child_b
|
||||
run jobs under child_a and child_b
|
||||
|
||||
create/delete following groups at random while jobs are running.
|
||||
/opt/cgroup/01/child_a/child_aa
|
||||
/opt/cgroup/01/child_b/child_bb
|
||||
/opt/cgroup/01/child_c
|
||||
|
||||
running new jobs in new group is also good.
|
||||
|
||||
9.6 Mount with other subsystems.
|
||||
Mounting with other subsystems is a good test because there is a
|
||||
race and lock dependency with other cgroup subsystems.
|
||||
|
||||
example)
|
||||
# mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
|
||||
|
||||
and do task move, mkdir, rmdir etc...under this.
|
@ -137,7 +137,32 @@ behind this approach is that a cgroup that aggressively uses a shared
|
||||
page will eventually get charged for it (once it is uncharged from
|
||||
the cgroup that brought it in -- this will happen on memory pressure).
|
||||
|
||||
2.4 Reclaim
|
||||
Exception: If CONFIG_CGROUP_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP is not used..
|
||||
When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to
|
||||
be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the
|
||||
caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP)
|
||||
Swap Extension allows you to record charge for swap. A swapped-in page is
|
||||
charged back to original page allocator if possible.
|
||||
|
||||
When swap is accounted, following files are added.
|
||||
- memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes.
|
||||
- memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes.
|
||||
|
||||
usage of mem+swap is limited by memsw.limit_in_bytes.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: why 'mem+swap' rather than swap.
|
||||
The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means
|
||||
to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of
|
||||
mem+swap.
|
||||
|
||||
In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without affecting
|
||||
global LRU, mem+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from OS point
|
||||
of view.
|
||||
|
||||
2.5 Reclaim
|
||||
|
||||
Each cgroup maintains a per cgroup LRU that consists of an active
|
||||
and inactive list. When a cgroup goes over its limit, we first try
|
||||
@ -207,12 +232,6 @@ exceeded.
|
||||
The memory.stat file gives accounting information. Now, the number of
|
||||
caches, RSS and Active pages/Inactive pages are shown.
|
||||
|
||||
The memory.force_empty gives an interface to drop *all* charges by force.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 1 > memory.force_empty
|
||||
|
||||
will drop all charges in cgroup. Currently, this is maintained for test.
|
||||
|
||||
4. Testing
|
||||
|
||||
Balbir posted lmbench, AIM9, LTP and vmmstress results [10] and [11].
|
||||
@ -242,10 +261,106 @@ reclaimed.
|
||||
|
||||
A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a
|
||||
cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all
|
||||
tasks have migrated away from it. Such charges are automatically dropped at
|
||||
rmdir() if there are no tasks.
|
||||
tasks have migrated away from it.
|
||||
Such charges are freed(at default) or moved to its parent. When moved,
|
||||
both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent.
|
||||
If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. See 5.1 Also.
|
||||
|
||||
5. TODO
|
||||
Charges recorded in swap information is not updated at removal of cgroup.
|
||||
Recorded information is discarded and a cgroup which uses swap (swapcache)
|
||||
will be charged as a new owner of it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5. Misc. interfaces.
|
||||
|
||||
5.1 force_empty
|
||||
memory.force_empty interface is provided to make cgroup's memory usage empty.
|
||||
You can use this interface only when the cgroup has no tasks.
|
||||
When writing anything to this
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 0 > memory.force_empty
|
||||
|
||||
Almost all pages tracked by this memcg will be unmapped and freed. Some of
|
||||
pages cannot be freed because it's locked or in-use. Such pages are moved
|
||||
to parent and this cgroup will be empty. But this may return -EBUSY in
|
||||
some too busy case.
|
||||
|
||||
Typical use case of this interface is that calling this before rmdir().
|
||||
Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be
|
||||
moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful.
|
||||
|
||||
5.2 stat file
|
||||
memory.stat file includes following statistics (now)
|
||||
cache - # of pages from page-cache and shmem.
|
||||
rss - # of pages from anonymous memory.
|
||||
pgpgin - # of event of charging
|
||||
pgpgout - # of event of uncharging
|
||||
active_anon - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem.
|
||||
inactive_anon - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem
|
||||
active_file - # of pages on active lru of file-cache
|
||||
inactive_file - # of pages on inactive lru of file cache
|
||||
unevictable - # of pages cannot be reclaimed.(mlocked etc)
|
||||
|
||||
Below is depend on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM.
|
||||
inactive_ratio - VM inernal parameter. (see mm/page_alloc.c)
|
||||
recent_rotated_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
|
||||
recent_rotated_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
|
||||
recent_scanned_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
|
||||
recent_scanned_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
|
||||
|
||||
Memo:
|
||||
recent_rotated means recent frequency of lru rotation.
|
||||
recent_scanned means recent # of scans to lru.
|
||||
showing for better debug please see the code for meanings.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5.3 swappiness
|
||||
Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only.
|
||||
|
||||
Following cgroup's swapiness can't be changed.
|
||||
- root cgroup (uses /proc/sys/vm/swappiness).
|
||||
- a cgroup which uses hierarchy and it has child cgroup.
|
||||
- a cgroup which uses hierarchy and not the root of hierarchy.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6. Hierarchy support
|
||||
|
||||
The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting.
|
||||
The hierarchy is created by creating the appropriate cgroups in the
|
||||
cgroup filesystem. Consider for example, the following cgroup filesystem
|
||||
hierarchy
|
||||
|
||||
root
|
||||
/ | \
|
||||
/ | \
|
||||
a b c
|
||||
| \
|
||||
| \
|
||||
d e
|
||||
|
||||
In the diagram above, with hierarchical accounting enabled, all memory
|
||||
usage of e, is accounted to its ancestors up until the root (i.e, c and root),
|
||||
that has memory.use_hierarchy enabled. If one of the ancestors goes over its
|
||||
limit, the reclaim algorithm reclaims from the tasks in the ancestor and the
|
||||
children of the ancestor.
|
||||
|
||||
6.1 Enabling hierarchical accounting and reclaim
|
||||
|
||||
The memory controller by default disables the hierarchy feature. Support
|
||||
can be enabled by writing 1 to memory.use_hierarchy file of the root cgroup
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 1 > memory.use_hierarchy
|
||||
|
||||
The feature can be disabled by
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other
|
||||
cgroups created below it.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE2: This feature can be enabled/disabled per subtree.
|
||||
|
||||
7. TODO
|
||||
|
||||
1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
|
||||
2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
|
@ -93,10 +93,8 @@ Several "PowerBook" and "iBook2" notebooks are supported.
|
||||
1.5 SuperH
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
The following SuperH processors are supported by cpufreq:
|
||||
|
||||
SH-3
|
||||
SH-4
|
||||
All SuperH processors supporting rate rounding through the clock
|
||||
framework are supported by cpufreq.
|
||||
|
||||
1.6 Blackfin
|
||||
------------
|
||||
|
@ -50,16 +50,17 @@ additional_cpus=n (*) Use this to limit hotpluggable cpus. This option sets
|
||||
cpu_possible_map = cpu_present_map + additional_cpus
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Option valid only for following architectures
|
||||
- x86_64, ia64
|
||||
- ia64
|
||||
|
||||
ia64 and x86_64 use the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT
|
||||
to determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation
|
||||
should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely on the
|
||||
apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't
|
||||
mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this
|
||||
parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map.
|
||||
ia64 uses the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT to
|
||||
determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation
|
||||
should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely
|
||||
on the apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event
|
||||
BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could
|
||||
use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the
|
||||
cpu_possible_map.
|
||||
|
||||
possible_cpus=n [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
|
||||
possible_cpus=n [s390,x86_64] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
|
||||
This option sets possible_cpus bits in
|
||||
cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
|
||||
constant even if the machine gets rebooted.
|
||||
|
@ -31,3 +31,51 @@ not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
|
||||
2) core_id: 0
|
||||
3) thread_siblings: just the given CPU
|
||||
4) core_siblings: just the given CPU
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, cpu topology information is provided under
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files. The internal
|
||||
source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
|
||||
|
||||
kernel_max: the maximum cpu index allowed by the kernel configuration.
|
||||
[NR_CPUS-1]
|
||||
|
||||
offline: cpus that are not online because they have been
|
||||
HOTPLUGGED off (see cpu-hotplug.txt) or exceed the limit
|
||||
of cpus allowed by the kernel configuration (kernel_max
|
||||
above). [~cpu_online_mask + cpus >= NR_CPUS]
|
||||
|
||||
online: cpus that are online and being scheduled [cpu_online_mask]
|
||||
|
||||
possible: cpus that have been allocated resources and can be
|
||||
brought online if they are present. [cpu_possible_mask]
|
||||
|
||||
present: cpus that have been identified as being present in the
|
||||
system. [cpu_present_mask]
|
||||
|
||||
The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
|
||||
[see <linux/cpumask.h>]. Some examples follow.
|
||||
|
||||
In this example, there are 64 cpus in the system but cpus 32-63 exceed
|
||||
the kernel max which is limited to 0..31 by the NR_CPUS config option
|
||||
being 32. Note also that cpus 2 and 4-31 are not online but could be
|
||||
brought online as they are both present and possible.
|
||||
|
||||
kernel_max: 31
|
||||
offline: 2,4-31,32-63
|
||||
online: 0-1,3
|
||||
possible: 0-31
|
||||
present: 0-31
|
||||
|
||||
In this example, the NR_CPUS config option is 128, but the kernel was
|
||||
started with possible_cpus=144. There are 4 cpus in the system and cpu2
|
||||
was manually taken offline (and is the only cpu that can be brought
|
||||
online.)
|
||||
|
||||
kernel_max: 127
|
||||
offline: 2,4-127,128-143
|
||||
online: 0-1,3
|
||||
possible: 0-127
|
||||
present: 0-3
|
||||
|
||||
See cpu-hotplug.txt for the possible_cpus=NUM kernel start parameter
|
||||
as well as more information on the various cpumask's.
|
||||
|
582
Documentation/credentials.txt
Normal file
582
Documentation/credentials.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,582 @@
|
||||
====================
|
||||
CREDENTIALS IN LINUX
|
||||
====================
|
||||
|
||||
By: David Howells <dhowells@redhat.com>
|
||||
|
||||
Contents:
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Overview.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Types of credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) File markings.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Task credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
- Immutable credentials.
|
||||
- Accessing task credentials.
|
||||
- Accessing another task's credentials.
|
||||
- Altering credentials.
|
||||
- Managing credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Open file credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Overriding the VFS's use of credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
========
|
||||
OVERVIEW
|
||||
========
|
||||
|
||||
There are several parts to the security check performed by Linux when one
|
||||
object acts upon another:
|
||||
|
||||
(1) Objects.
|
||||
|
||||
Objects are things in the system that may be acted upon directly by
|
||||
userspace programs. Linux has a variety of actionable objects, including:
|
||||
|
||||
- Tasks
|
||||
- Files/inodes
|
||||
- Sockets
|
||||
- Message queues
|
||||
- Shared memory segments
|
||||
- Semaphores
|
||||
- Keys
|
||||
|
||||
As a part of the description of all these objects there is a set of
|
||||
credentials. What's in the set depends on the type of object.
|
||||
|
||||
(2) Object ownership.
|
||||
|
||||
Amongst the credentials of most objects, there will be a subset that
|
||||
indicates the ownership of that object. This is used for resource
|
||||
accounting and limitation (disk quotas and task rlimits for example).
|
||||
|
||||
In a standard UNIX filesystem, for instance, this will be defined by the
|
||||
UID marked on the inode.
|
||||
|
||||
(3) The objective context.
|
||||
|
||||
Also amongst the credentials of those objects, there will be a subset that
|
||||
indicates the 'objective context' of that object. This may or may not be
|
||||
the same set as in (2) - in standard UNIX files, for instance, this is the
|
||||
defined by the UID and the GID marked on the inode.
|
||||
|
||||
The objective context is used as part of the security calculation that is
|
||||
carried out when an object is acted upon.
|
||||
|
||||
(4) Subjects.
|
||||
|
||||
A subject is an object that is acting upon another object.
|
||||
|
||||
Most of the objects in the system are inactive: they don't act on other
|
||||
objects within the system. Processes/tasks are the obvious exception:
|
||||
they do stuff; they access and manipulate things.
|
||||
|
||||
Objects other than tasks may under some circumstances also be subjects.
|
||||
For instance an open file may send SIGIO to a task using the UID and EUID
|
||||
given to it by a task that called fcntl(F_SETOWN) upon it. In this case,
|
||||
the file struct will have a subjective context too.
|
||||
|
||||
(5) The subjective context.
|
||||
|
||||
A subject has an additional interpretation of its credentials. A subset
|
||||
of its credentials forms the 'subjective context'. The subjective context
|
||||
is used as part of the security calculation that is carried out when a
|
||||
subject acts.
|
||||
|
||||
A Linux task, for example, has the FSUID, FSGID and the supplementary
|
||||
group list for when it is acting upon a file - which are quite separate
|
||||
from the real UID and GID that normally form the objective context of the
|
||||
task.
|
||||
|
||||
(6) Actions.
|
||||
|
||||
Linux has a number of actions available that a subject may perform upon an
|
||||
object. The set of actions available depends on the nature of the subject
|
||||
and the object.
|
||||
|
||||
Actions include reading, writing, creating and deleting files; forking or
|
||||
signalling and tracing tasks.
|
||||
|
||||
(7) Rules, access control lists and security calculations.
|
||||
|
||||
When a subject acts upon an object, a security calculation is made. This
|
||||
involves taking the subjective context, the objective context and the
|
||||
action, and searching one or more sets of rules to see whether the subject
|
||||
is granted or denied permission to act in the desired manner on the
|
||||
object, given those contexts.
|
||||
|
||||
There are two main sources of rules:
|
||||
|
||||
(a) Discretionary access control (DAC):
|
||||
|
||||
Sometimes the object will include sets of rules as part of its
|
||||
description. This is an 'Access Control List' or 'ACL'. A Linux
|
||||
file may supply more than one ACL.
|
||||
|
||||
A traditional UNIX file, for example, includes a permissions mask that
|
||||
is an abbreviated ACL with three fixed classes of subject ('user',
|
||||
'group' and 'other'), each of which may be granted certain privileges
|
||||
('read', 'write' and 'execute' - whatever those map to for the object
|
||||
in question). UNIX file permissions do not allow the arbitrary
|
||||
specification of subjects, however, and so are of limited use.
|
||||
|
||||
A Linux file might also sport a POSIX ACL. This is a list of rules
|
||||
that grants various permissions to arbitrary subjects.
|
||||
|
||||
(b) Mandatory access control (MAC):
|
||||
|
||||
The system as a whole may have one or more sets of rules that get
|
||||
applied to all subjects and objects, regardless of their source.
|
||||
SELinux and Smack are examples of this.
|
||||
|
||||
In the case of SELinux and Smack, each object is given a label as part
|
||||
of its credentials. When an action is requested, they take the
|
||||
subject label, the object label and the action and look for a rule
|
||||
that says that this action is either granted or denied.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
====================
|
||||
TYPES OF CREDENTIALS
|
||||
====================
|
||||
|
||||
The Linux kernel supports the following types of credentials:
|
||||
|
||||
(1) Traditional UNIX credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
Real User ID
|
||||
Real Group ID
|
||||
|
||||
The UID and GID are carried by most, if not all, Linux objects, even if in
|
||||
some cases it has to be invented (FAT or CIFS files for example, which are
|
||||
derived from Windows). These (mostly) define the objective context of
|
||||
that object, with tasks being slightly different in some cases.
|
||||
|
||||
Effective, Saved and FS User ID
|
||||
Effective, Saved and FS Group ID
|
||||
Supplementary groups
|
||||
|
||||
These are additional credentials used by tasks only. Usually, an
|
||||
EUID/EGID/GROUPS will be used as the subjective context, and real UID/GID
|
||||
will be used as the objective. For tasks, it should be noted that this is
|
||||
not always true.
|
||||
|
||||
(2) Capabilities.
|
||||
|
||||
Set of permitted capabilities
|
||||
Set of inheritable capabilities
|
||||
Set of effective capabilities
|
||||
Capability bounding set
|
||||
|
||||
These are only carried by tasks. They indicate superior capabilities
|
||||
granted piecemeal to a task that an ordinary task wouldn't otherwise have.
|
||||
These are manipulated implicitly by changes to the traditional UNIX
|
||||
credentials, but can also be manipulated directly by the capset() system
|
||||
call.
|
||||
|
||||
The permitted capabilities are those caps that the process might grant
|
||||
itself to its effective or permitted sets through capset(). This
|
||||
inheritable set might also be so constrained.
|
||||
|
||||
The effective capabilities are the ones that a task is actually allowed to
|
||||
make use of itself.
|
||||
|
||||
The inheritable capabilities are the ones that may get passed across
|
||||
execve().
|
||||
|
||||
The bounding set limits the capabilities that may be inherited across
|
||||
execve(), especially when a binary is executed that will execute as UID 0.
|
||||
|
||||
(3) Secure management flags (securebits).
|
||||
|
||||
These are only carried by tasks. These govern the way the above
|
||||
credentials are manipulated and inherited over certain operations such as
|
||||
execve(). They aren't used directly as objective or subjective
|
||||
credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
(4) Keys and keyrings.
|
||||
|
||||
These are only carried by tasks. They carry and cache security tokens
|
||||
that don't fit into the other standard UNIX credentials. They are for
|
||||
making such things as network filesystem keys available to the file
|
||||
accesses performed by processes, without the necessity of ordinary
|
||||
programs having to know about security details involved.
|
||||
|
||||
Keyrings are a special type of key. They carry sets of other keys and can
|
||||
be searched for the desired key. Each process may subscribe to a number
|
||||
of keyrings:
|
||||
|
||||
Per-thread keying
|
||||
Per-process keyring
|
||||
Per-session keyring
|
||||
|
||||
When a process accesses a key, if not already present, it will normally be
|
||||
cached on one of these keyrings for future accesses to find.
|
||||
|
||||
For more information on using keys, see Documentation/keys.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
(5) LSM
|
||||
|
||||
The Linux Security Module allows extra controls to be placed over the
|
||||
operations that a task may do. Currently Linux supports two main
|
||||
alternate LSM options: SELinux and Smack.
|
||||
|
||||
Both work by labelling the objects in a system and then applying sets of
|
||||
rules (policies) that say what operations a task with one label may do to
|
||||
an object with another label.
|
||||
|
||||
(6) AF_KEY
|
||||
|
||||
This is a socket-based approach to credential management for networking
|
||||
stacks [RFC 2367]. It isn't discussed by this document as it doesn't
|
||||
interact directly with task and file credentials; rather it keeps system
|
||||
level credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When a file is opened, part of the opening task's subjective context is
|
||||
recorded in the file struct created. This allows operations using that file
|
||||
struct to use those credentials instead of the subjective context of the task
|
||||
that issued the operation. An example of this would be a file opened on a
|
||||
network filesystem where the credentials of the opened file should be presented
|
||||
to the server, regardless of who is actually doing a read or a write upon it.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=============
|
||||
FILE MARKINGS
|
||||
=============
|
||||
|
||||
Files on disk or obtained over the network may have annotations that form the
|
||||
objective security context of that file. Depending on the type of filesystem,
|
||||
this may include one or more of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
(*) UNIX UID, GID, mode;
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Windows user ID;
|
||||
|
||||
(*) Access control list;
|
||||
|
||||
(*) LSM security label;
|
||||
|
||||
(*) UNIX exec privilege escalation bits (SUID/SGID);
|
||||
|
||||
(*) File capabilities exec privilege escalation bits.
|
||||
|
||||
These are compared to the task's subjective security context, and certain
|
||||
operations allowed or disallowed as a result. In the case of execve(), the
|
||||
privilege escalation bits come into play, and may allow the resulting process
|
||||
extra privileges, based on the annotations on the executable file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
================
|
||||
TASK CREDENTIALS
|
||||
================
|
||||
|
||||
In Linux, all of a task's credentials are held in (uid, gid) or through
|
||||
(groups, keys, LSM security) a refcounted structure of type 'struct cred'.
|
||||
Each task points to its credentials by a pointer called 'cred' in its
|
||||
task_struct.
|
||||
|
||||
Once a set of credentials has been prepared and committed, it may not be
|
||||
changed, barring the following exceptions:
|
||||
|
||||
(1) its reference count may be changed;
|
||||
|
||||
(2) the reference count on the group_info struct it points to may be changed;
|
||||
|
||||
(3) the reference count on the security data it points to may be changed;
|
||||
|
||||
(4) the reference count on any keyrings it points to may be changed;
|
||||
|
||||
(5) any keyrings it points to may be revoked, expired or have their security
|
||||
attributes changed; and
|
||||
|
||||
(6) the contents of any keyrings to which it points may be changed (the whole
|
||||
point of keyrings being a shared set of credentials, modifiable by anyone
|
||||
with appropriate access).
|
||||
|
||||
To alter anything in the cred struct, the copy-and-replace principle must be
|
||||
adhered to. First take a copy, then alter the copy and then use RCU to change
|
||||
the task pointer to make it point to the new copy. There are wrappers to aid
|
||||
with this (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
A task may only alter its _own_ credentials; it is no longer permitted for a
|
||||
task to alter another's credentials. This means the capset() system call is no
|
||||
longer permitted to take any PID other than the one of the current process.
|
||||
Also keyctl_instantiate() and keyctl_negate() functions no longer permit
|
||||
attachment to process-specific keyrings in the requesting process as the
|
||||
instantiating process may need to create them.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IMMUTABLE CREDENTIALS
|
||||
---------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Once a set of credentials has been made public (by calling commit_creds() for
|
||||
example), it must be considered immutable, barring two exceptions:
|
||||
|
||||
(1) The reference count may be altered.
|
||||
|
||||
(2) Whilst the keyring subscriptions of a set of credentials may not be
|
||||
changed, the keyrings subscribed to may have their contents altered.
|
||||
|
||||
To catch accidental credential alteration at compile time, struct task_struct
|
||||
has _const_ pointers to its credential sets, as does struct file. Furthermore,
|
||||
certain functions such as get_cred() and put_cred() operate on const pointers,
|
||||
thus rendering casts unnecessary, but require to temporarily ditch the const
|
||||
qualification to be able to alter the reference count.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACCESSING TASK CREDENTIALS
|
||||
--------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
A task being able to alter only its own credentials permits the current process
|
||||
to read or replace its own credentials without the need for any form of locking
|
||||
- which simplifies things greatly. It can just call:
|
||||
|
||||
const struct cred *current_cred()
|
||||
|
||||
to get a pointer to its credentials structure, and it doesn't have to release
|
||||
it afterwards.
|
||||
|
||||
There are convenience wrappers for retrieving specific aspects of a task's
|
||||
credentials (the value is simply returned in each case):
|
||||
|
||||
uid_t current_uid(void) Current's real UID
|
||||
gid_t current_gid(void) Current's real GID
|
||||
uid_t current_euid(void) Current's effective UID
|
||||
gid_t current_egid(void) Current's effective GID
|
||||
uid_t current_fsuid(void) Current's file access UID
|
||||
gid_t current_fsgid(void) Current's file access GID
|
||||
kernel_cap_t current_cap(void) Current's effective capabilities
|
||||
void *current_security(void) Current's LSM security pointer
|
||||
struct user_struct *current_user(void) Current's user account
|
||||
|
||||
There are also convenience wrappers for retrieving specific associated pairs of
|
||||
a task's credentials:
|
||||
|
||||
void current_uid_gid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
|
||||
void current_euid_egid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
|
||||
void current_fsuid_fsgid(uid_t *, gid_t *);
|
||||
|
||||
which return these pairs of values through their arguments after retrieving
|
||||
them from the current task's credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In addition, there is a function for obtaining a reference on the current
|
||||
process's current set of credentials:
|
||||
|
||||
const struct cred *get_current_cred(void);
|
||||
|
||||
and functions for getting references to one of the credentials that don't
|
||||
actually live in struct cred:
|
||||
|
||||
struct user_struct *get_current_user(void);
|
||||
struct group_info *get_current_groups(void);
|
||||
|
||||
which get references to the current process's user accounting structure and
|
||||
supplementary groups list respectively.
|
||||
|
||||
Once a reference has been obtained, it must be released with put_cred(),
|
||||
free_uid() or put_group_info() as appropriate.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACCESSING ANOTHER TASK'S CREDENTIALS
|
||||
------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Whilst a task may access its own credentials without the need for locking, the
|
||||
same is not true of a task wanting to access another task's credentials. It
|
||||
must use the RCU read lock and rcu_dereference().
|
||||
|
||||
The rcu_dereference() is wrapped by:
|
||||
|
||||
const struct cred *__task_cred(struct task_struct *task);
|
||||
|
||||
This should be used inside the RCU read lock, as in the following example:
|
||||
|
||||
void foo(struct task_struct *t, struct foo_data *f)
|
||||
{
|
||||
const struct cred *tcred;
|
||||
...
|
||||
rcu_read_lock();
|
||||
tcred = __task_cred(t);
|
||||
f->uid = tcred->uid;
|
||||
f->gid = tcred->gid;
|
||||
f->groups = get_group_info(tcred->groups);
|
||||
rcu_read_unlock();
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
A function need not get RCU read lock to use __task_cred() if it is holding a
|
||||
spinlock at the time as this implicitly holds the RCU read lock.
|
||||
|
||||
Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of
|
||||
time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a
|
||||
reference on them using:
|
||||
|
||||
const struct cred *get_task_cred(struct task_struct *task);
|
||||
|
||||
This does all the RCU magic inside of it. The caller must call put_cred() on
|
||||
the credentials so obtained when they're finished with.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a couple of convenience functions to access bits of another task's
|
||||
credentials, hiding the RCU magic from the caller:
|
||||
|
||||
uid_t task_uid(task) Task's real UID
|
||||
uid_t task_euid(task) Task's effective UID
|
||||
|
||||
If the caller is holding a spinlock or the RCU read lock at the time anyway,
|
||||
then:
|
||||
|
||||
__task_cred(task)->uid
|
||||
__task_cred(task)->euid
|
||||
|
||||
should be used instead. Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials
|
||||
need to be accessed, RCU read lock or a spinlock should be used, __task_cred()
|
||||
called, the result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential
|
||||
aspects called from that before dropping the lock. This prevents the
|
||||
potentially expensive RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
|
||||
|
||||
Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be
|
||||
accessed, then this can be used:
|
||||
|
||||
task_cred_xxx(task, member)
|
||||
|
||||
where 'member' is a non-pointer member of the cred struct. For instance:
|
||||
|
||||
uid_t task_cred_xxx(task, suid);
|
||||
|
||||
will retrieve 'struct cred::suid' from the task, doing the appropriate RCU
|
||||
magic. This may not be used for pointer members as what they point to may
|
||||
disappear the moment the RCU read lock is dropped.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ALTERING CREDENTIALS
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
|
||||
As previously mentioned, a task may only alter its own credentials, and may not
|
||||
alter those of another task. This means that it doesn't need to use any
|
||||
locking to alter its own credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
To alter the current process's credentials, a function should first prepare a
|
||||
new set of credentials by calling:
|
||||
|
||||
struct cred *prepare_creds(void);
|
||||
|
||||
this locks current->cred_replace_mutex and then allocates and constructs a
|
||||
duplicate of the current process's credentials, returning with the mutex still
|
||||
held if successful. It returns NULL if not successful (out of memory).
|
||||
|
||||
The mutex prevents ptrace() from altering the ptrace state of a process whilst
|
||||
security checks on credentials construction and changing is taking place as
|
||||
the ptrace state may alter the outcome, particularly in the case of execve().
|
||||
|
||||
The new credentials set should be altered appropriately, and any security
|
||||
checks and hooks done. Both the current and the proposed sets of credentials
|
||||
are available for this purpose as current_cred() will return the current set
|
||||
still at this point.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When the credential set is ready, it should be committed to the current process
|
||||
by calling:
|
||||
|
||||
int commit_creds(struct cred *new);
|
||||
|
||||
This will alter various aspects of the credentials and the process, giving the
|
||||
LSM a chance to do likewise, then it will use rcu_assign_pointer() to actually
|
||||
commit the new credentials to current->cred, it will release
|
||||
current->cred_replace_mutex to allow ptrace() to take place, and it will notify
|
||||
the scheduler and others of the changes.
|
||||
|
||||
This function is guaranteed to return 0, so that it can be tail-called at the
|
||||
end of such functions as sys_setresuid().
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this function consumes the caller's reference to the new credentials.
|
||||
The caller should _not_ call put_cred() on the new credentials afterwards.
|
||||
|
||||
Furthermore, once this function has been called on a new set of credentials,
|
||||
those credentials may _not_ be changed further.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Should the security checks fail or some other error occur after prepare_creds()
|
||||
has been called, then the following function should be invoked:
|
||||
|
||||
void abort_creds(struct cred *new);
|
||||
|
||||
This releases the lock on current->cred_replace_mutex that prepare_creds() got
|
||||
and then releases the new credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A typical credentials alteration function would look something like this:
|
||||
|
||||
int alter_suid(uid_t suid)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct cred *new;
|
||||
int ret;
|
||||
|
||||
new = prepare_creds();
|
||||
if (!new)
|
||||
return -ENOMEM;
|
||||
|
||||
new->suid = suid;
|
||||
ret = security_alter_suid(new);
|
||||
if (ret < 0) {
|
||||
abort_creds(new);
|
||||
return ret;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return commit_creds(new);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MANAGING CREDENTIALS
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
|
||||
There are some functions to help manage credentials:
|
||||
|
||||
(*) void put_cred(const struct cred *cred);
|
||||
|
||||
This releases a reference to the given set of credentials. If the
|
||||
reference count reaches zero, the credentials will be scheduled for
|
||||
destruction by the RCU system.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) const struct cred *get_cred(const struct cred *cred);
|
||||
|
||||
This gets a reference on a live set of credentials, returning a pointer to
|
||||
that set of credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) struct cred *get_new_cred(struct cred *cred);
|
||||
|
||||
This gets a reference on a set of credentials that is under construction
|
||||
and is thus still mutable, returning a pointer to that set of credentials.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=====================
|
||||
OPEN FILE CREDENTIALS
|
||||
=====================
|
||||
|
||||
When a new file is opened, a reference is obtained on the opening task's
|
||||
credentials and this is attached to the file struct as 'f_cred' in place of
|
||||
'f_uid' and 'f_gid'. Code that used to access file->f_uid and file->f_gid
|
||||
should now access file->f_cred->fsuid and file->f_cred->fsgid.
|
||||
|
||||
It is safe to access f_cred without the use of RCU or locking because the
|
||||
pointer will not change over the lifetime of the file struct, and nor will the
|
||||
contents of the cred struct pointed to, barring the exceptions listed above
|
||||
(see the Task Credentials section).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=======================================
|
||||
OVERRIDING THE VFS'S USE OF CREDENTIALS
|
||||
=======================================
|
||||
|
||||
Under some circumstances it is desirable to override the credentials used by
|
||||
the VFS, and that can be done by calling into such as vfs_mkdir() with a
|
||||
different set of credentials. This is done in the following places:
|
||||
|
||||
(*) sys_faccessat().
|
||||
|
||||
(*) do_coredump().
|
||||
|
||||
(*) nfs4recover.c.
|
@ -13,9 +13,9 @@
|
||||
3.6 Constraints
|
||||
3.7 Example
|
||||
|
||||
4 DRIVER DEVELOPER NOTES
|
||||
4 DMAENGINE DRIVER DEVELOPER NOTES
|
||||
4.1 Conformance points
|
||||
4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
|
||||
4.2 "My application needs exclusive control of hardware channels"
|
||||
|
||||
5 SOURCE
|
||||
|
||||
@ -150,6 +150,7 @@ ops_run_* and ops_complete_* routines in drivers/md/raid5.c for more
|
||||
implementation examples.
|
||||
|
||||
4 DRIVER DEVELOPMENT NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
4.1 Conformance points:
|
||||
There are a few conformance points required in dmaengine drivers to
|
||||
accommodate assumptions made by applications using the async_tx API:
|
||||
@ -158,58 +159,49 @@ accommodate assumptions made by applications using the async_tx API:
|
||||
3/ Use async_tx_run_dependencies() in the descriptor clean up path to
|
||||
handle submission of dependent operations
|
||||
|
||||
4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
|
||||
This requirement seems to arise from cases where a DMA engine driver is
|
||||
trying to support device-to-memory DMA. The dmaengine and async_tx
|
||||
implementations were designed for offloading memory-to-memory
|
||||
operations; however, there are some capabilities of the dmaengine layer
|
||||
that can be used for platform-specific channel management.
|
||||
Platform-specific constraints can be handled by registering the
|
||||
application as a 'dma_client' and implementing a 'dma_event_callback' to
|
||||
apply a filter to the available channels in the system. Before showing
|
||||
how to implement a custom dma_event callback some background of
|
||||
dmaengine's client support is required.
|
||||
4.2 "My application needs exclusive control of hardware channels"
|
||||
Primarily this requirement arises from cases where a DMA engine driver
|
||||
is being used to support device-to-memory operations. A channel that is
|
||||
performing these operations cannot, for many platform specific reasons,
|
||||
be shared. For these cases the dma_request_channel() interface is
|
||||
provided.
|
||||
|
||||
The following routines in dmaengine support multiple clients requesting
|
||||
use of a channel:
|
||||
- dma_async_client_register(struct dma_client *client)
|
||||
- dma_async_client_chan_request(struct dma_client *client)
|
||||
The interface is:
|
||||
struct dma_chan *dma_request_channel(dma_cap_mask_t mask,
|
||||
dma_filter_fn filter_fn,
|
||||
void *filter_param);
|
||||
|
||||
dma_async_client_register takes a pointer to an initialized dma_client
|
||||
structure. It expects that the 'event_callback' and 'cap_mask' fields
|
||||
are already initialized.
|
||||
Where dma_filter_fn is defined as:
|
||||
typedef bool (*dma_filter_fn)(struct dma_chan *chan, void *filter_param);
|
||||
|
||||
dma_async_client_chan_request triggers dmaengine to notify the client of
|
||||
all channels that satisfy the capability mask. It is up to the client's
|
||||
event_callback routine to track how many channels the client needs and
|
||||
how many it is currently using. The dma_event_callback routine returns a
|
||||
dma_state_client code to let dmaengine know the status of the
|
||||
allocation.
|
||||
When the optional 'filter_fn' parameter is set to NULL
|
||||
dma_request_channel simply returns the first channel that satisfies the
|
||||
capability mask. Otherwise, when the mask parameter is insufficient for
|
||||
specifying the necessary channel, the filter_fn routine can be used to
|
||||
disposition the available channels in the system. The filter_fn routine
|
||||
is called once for each free channel in the system. Upon seeing a
|
||||
suitable channel filter_fn returns DMA_ACK which flags that channel to
|
||||
be the return value from dma_request_channel. A channel allocated via
|
||||
this interface is exclusive to the caller, until dma_release_channel()
|
||||
is called.
|
||||
|
||||
Below is the example of how to extend this functionality for
|
||||
platform-specific filtering of the available channels beyond the
|
||||
standard capability mask:
|
||||
The DMA_PRIVATE capability flag is used to tag dma devices that should
|
||||
not be used by the general-purpose allocator. It can be set at
|
||||
initialization time if it is known that a channel will always be
|
||||
private. Alternatively, it is set when dma_request_channel() finds an
|
||||
unused "public" channel.
|
||||
|
||||
static enum dma_state_client
|
||||
my_dma_client_callback(struct dma_client *client,
|
||||
struct dma_chan *chan, enum dma_state state)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct dma_device *dma_dev;
|
||||
struct my_platform_specific_dma *plat_dma_dev;
|
||||
|
||||
dma_dev = chan->device;
|
||||
plat_dma_dev = container_of(dma_dev,
|
||||
struct my_platform_specific_dma,
|
||||
dma_dev);
|
||||
|
||||
if (!plat_dma_dev->platform_specific_capability)
|
||||
return DMA_DUP;
|
||||
|
||||
. . .
|
||||
}
|
||||
A couple caveats to note when implementing a driver and consumer:
|
||||
1/ Once a channel has been privately allocated it will no longer be
|
||||
considered by the general-purpose allocator even after a call to
|
||||
dma_release_channel().
|
||||
2/ Since capabilities are specified at the device level a dma_device
|
||||
with multiple channels will either have all channels public, or all
|
||||
channels private.
|
||||
|
||||
5 SOURCE
|
||||
include/linux/dmaengine.h: core header file for DMA drivers and clients
|
||||
|
||||
include/linux/dmaengine.h: core header file for DMA drivers and api users
|
||||
drivers/dma/dmaengine.c: offload engine channel management routines
|
||||
drivers/dma/: location for offload engine drivers
|
||||
include/linux/async_tx.h: core header file for the async_tx api
|
||||
|
@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded.
|
||||
Also echoing either mono ,packet or init in to image_type will free up the
|
||||
memory allocated by the driver.
|
||||
|
||||
If an user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
|
||||
it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries to disappear.
|
||||
If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
|
||||
it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear.
|
||||
The entries can be recreated by doing the following
|
||||
echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
|
||||
NOTE: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
|
||||
|
@ -375,10 +375,10 @@ say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the
|
||||
justification is solid.
|
||||
|
||||
When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible,
|
||||
ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.
|
||||
ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.
|
||||
This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that
|
||||
interface. It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is
|
||||
a change that they need to respond to. Supporting out-of-tree code is not
|
||||
something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do
|
||||
not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to
|
||||
be.
|
||||
not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it needs to
|
||||
be.
|
||||
|
1
Documentation/dmaengine.txt
Normal file
1
Documentation/dmaengine.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
See Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
|
69
Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt
Normal file
69
Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
|
||||
How to set up the Technisat devices
|
||||
===================================
|
||||
|
||||
1) Find out what device you have
|
||||
================================
|
||||
|
||||
First start your linux box with a shipped kernel:
|
||||
lspci -vvv for a PCI device (lsusb -vvv for an USB device) will show you for example:
|
||||
02:0b.0 Network controller: Techsan Electronics Co Ltd B2C2 FlexCopII DVB chip / Technisat SkyStar2 DVB card (rev 02)
|
||||
|
||||
dmesg | grep frontend may show you for example:
|
||||
DVB: registering frontend 0 (Conexant CX24123/CX24109)...
|
||||
|
||||
2) Kernel compilation:
|
||||
======================
|
||||
|
||||
If the Technisat is the only TV device in your box get rid of unnecessary modules and check this one:
|
||||
"Multimedia devices" => "Customise analog and hybrid tuner modules to build"
|
||||
In this directory uncheck every driver which is activated there.
|
||||
|
||||
Then please activate:
|
||||
2a) Main module part:
|
||||
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC PCI" in case of a PCI card OR
|
||||
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC USB" in case of an USB 1.1 adapter
|
||||
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Enable debug for the B2C2 FlexCop drivers"
|
||||
Notice: d.) is helpful for troubleshooting
|
||||
|
||||
2b) Frontend module part:
|
||||
|
||||
1.) Revision 2.3:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink VP310/MT312/ZL10313 based"
|
||||
|
||||
2.) Revision 2.6:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0299 based"
|
||||
|
||||
3.) Revision 2.7:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Samsung S5H1420 based"
|
||||
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Integrant ITD1000 Zero IF tuner for DVB-S/DSS"
|
||||
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller"
|
||||
|
||||
4.) Revision 2.8:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24113/CX24128 tuner for DVB-S/DSS"
|
||||
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24123 based"
|
||||
d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller"
|
||||
|
||||
5.) DVB-T card:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink MT352 based"
|
||||
|
||||
6.) DVB-C card:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0297 based"
|
||||
|
||||
7.) ATSC card 1st generation:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Broadcom BCM3510"
|
||||
|
||||
8.) ATSC card 2nd generation:
|
||||
a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build"
|
||||
b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "NxtWave Communications NXT2002/NXT2004 based"
|
||||
c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "LG Electronics LGDT3302/LGDT3303 based"
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Uwe Bugla <uwe.bugla@gmx.de> December 2008
|
@ -5,9 +5,13 @@ The driver supports the following options, either via
|
||||
options=<OPTIONS> when modular or video=pxafb:<OPTIONS> when built in.
|
||||
|
||||
For example:
|
||||
modprobe pxafb options=mode:640x480-8,passive
|
||||
modprobe pxafb options=vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
|
||||
or on the kernel command line
|
||||
video=pxafb:mode:640x480-8,passive
|
||||
video=pxafb:vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive
|
||||
|
||||
vmem: VIDEO_MEM_SIZE
|
||||
Amount of video memory to allocate (can be suffixed with K or M
|
||||
for kilobytes or megabytes)
|
||||
|
||||
mode:XRESxYRES[-BPP]
|
||||
XRES == LCCR1_PPL + 1
|
||||
@ -52,3 +56,87 @@ outputen:POLARITY
|
||||
pixclockpol:POLARITY
|
||||
pixel clock polarity
|
||||
0 => falling edge, 1 => rising edge
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Overlay Support for PXA27x and later LCD controllers
|
||||
====================================================
|
||||
|
||||
PXA27x and later processors support overlay1 and overlay2 on-top of the
|
||||
base framebuffer (although under-neath the base is also possible). They
|
||||
support palette and no-palette RGB formats, as well as YUV formats (only
|
||||
available on overlay2). These overlays have dedicated DMA channels and
|
||||
behave in a similar way as a framebuffer.
|
||||
|
||||
However, there are some differences between these overlay framebuffers
|
||||
and normal framebuffers, as listed below:
|
||||
|
||||
1. overlay can start at a 32-bit word aligned position within the base
|
||||
framebuffer, which means they have a start (x, y). This information
|
||||
is encoded into var->nonstd (no, var->xoffset and var->yoffset are
|
||||
not for such purpose).
|
||||
|
||||
2. overlay framebuffer is allocated dynamically according to specified
|
||||
'struct fb_var_screeninfo', the amount is decided by:
|
||||
|
||||
var->xres_virtual * var->yres_virtual * bpp
|
||||
|
||||
bpp = 16 -- for RGB565 or RGBT555
|
||||
= 24 -- for YUV444 packed
|
||||
= 24 -- for YUV444 planar
|
||||
= 16 -- for YUV422 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/2 Cb + 1/2 Cr)
|
||||
= 12 -- for YUV420 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/4 Cb + 1/4 Cr)
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE:
|
||||
|
||||
a. overlay does not support panning in x-direction, thus
|
||||
var->xres_virtual will always be equal to var->xres
|
||||
|
||||
b. line length of overlay(s) must be on a 32-bit word boundary,
|
||||
for YUV planar modes, it is a requirement for the component
|
||||
with minimum bits per pixel, e.g. for YUV420, Cr component
|
||||
for one pixel is actually 2-bits, it means the line length
|
||||
should be a multiple of 16-pixels
|
||||
|
||||
c. starting horizontal position (XPOS) should start on a 32-bit
|
||||
word boundary, otherwise the fb_check_var() will just fail.
|
||||
|
||||
d. the rectangle of the overlay should be within the base plane,
|
||||
otherwise fail
|
||||
|
||||
Applications should follow the sequence below to operate an overlay
|
||||
framebuffer:
|
||||
|
||||
a. open("/dev/fb[1-2]", ...)
|
||||
b. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_VSCREENINFO, ...)
|
||||
c. modify 'var' with desired parameters:
|
||||
1) var->xres and var->yres
|
||||
2) larger var->yres_virtual if more memory is required,
|
||||
usually for double-buffering
|
||||
3) var->nonstd for starting (x, y) and color format
|
||||
4) var->{red, green, blue, transp} if RGB mode is to be used
|
||||
d. ioctl(fd, FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO, ...)
|
||||
e. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_FSCREENINFO, ...)
|
||||
f. mmap
|
||||
g. ...
|
||||
|
||||
3. for YUV planar formats, these are actually not supported within the
|
||||
framebuffer framework, application has to take care of the offsets
|
||||
and lengths of each component within the framebuffer.
|
||||
|
||||
4. var->nonstd is used to pass starting (x, y) position and color format,
|
||||
the detailed bit fields are shown below:
|
||||
|
||||
31 23 20 10 0
|
||||
+-----------------+---+----------+----------+
|
||||
| ... unused ... |FOR| XPOS | YPOS |
|
||||
+-----------------+---+----------+----------+
|
||||
|
||||
FOR - color format, as defined by OVERLAY_FORMAT_* in pxafb.h
|
||||
0 - RGB
|
||||
1 - YUV444 PACKED
|
||||
2 - YUV444 PLANAR
|
||||
3 - YUV422 PLANAR
|
||||
4 - YUR420 PLANAR
|
||||
|
||||
XPOS - starting horizontal position
|
||||
YPOS - starting vertical position
|
||||
|
@ -120,13 +120,6 @@ Who: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: eepro100 network driver
|
||||
When: January 2007
|
||||
Why: replaced by the e100 driver
|
||||
Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: Unused EXPORT_SYMBOL/EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL exports
|
||||
(temporary transition config option provided until then)
|
||||
The transition config option will also be removed at the same time.
|
||||
@ -244,18 +237,6 @@ Who: Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: init_mm export
|
||||
When: 2.6.26
|
||||
Why: Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to
|
||||
work around problems in the CPA code which should be resolved
|
||||
by now. One usecase was described to provide verification code
|
||||
of the CPA operation. That's a good idea in general, but such
|
||||
code / infrastructure should be in the kernel and not in some
|
||||
out-of-tree driver.
|
||||
Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
|
||||
|
||||
----------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: usedac i386 kernel parameter
|
||||
When: 2.6.27
|
||||
Why: replaced by allowdac and no dac combination
|
||||
@ -329,17 +310,28 @@ Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI)
|
||||
When: 2.6.29
|
||||
Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which
|
||||
eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more
|
||||
efficient in every way.
|
||||
Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: i2c_attach_client(), i2c_detach_client(), i2c_driver->detach_client()
|
||||
When: 2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely)
|
||||
Why: Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use
|
||||
i2c_driver->probe() and ->remove() instead.
|
||||
Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: fscher and fscpos drivers
|
||||
When: June 2009
|
||||
Why: Deprecated by the new fschmd driver.
|
||||
Who: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
|
||||
Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
|
||||
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
What: SELinux "compat_net" functionality
|
||||
When: 2.6.30 at the earliest
|
||||
Why: In 2.6.18 the Secmark concept was introduced to replace the "compat_net"
|
||||
network access control functionality of SELinux. Secmark offers both
|
||||
better performance and greater flexibility than the "compat_net"
|
||||
mechanism. Now that the major Linux distributions have moved to
|
||||
Secmark, it is time to deprecate the older mechanism and start the
|
||||
process of removing the old code.
|
||||
Who: Paul Moore <paul.moore@hp.com>
|
||||
|
@ -97,8 +97,8 @@ prototypes:
|
||||
void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
|
||||
void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
|
||||
int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
|
||||
void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
|
||||
@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ delete_inode: no
|
||||
put_super: yes yes no
|
||||
write_super: no yes read
|
||||
sync_fs: no no read
|
||||
write_super_lockfs: ?
|
||||
unlockfs: ?
|
||||
freeze_fs: ?
|
||||
unfreeze_fs: ?
|
||||
statfs: no no no
|
||||
remount_fs: yes yes maybe (see below)
|
||||
clear_inode: no
|
||||
@ -394,11 +394,10 @@ prototypes:
|
||||
unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long,
|
||||
unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
|
||||
int (*check_flags)(int);
|
||||
int (*dir_notify)(struct file *, unsigned long);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
locking rules:
|
||||
All except ->poll() may block.
|
||||
All may block.
|
||||
BKL
|
||||
llseek: no (see below)
|
||||
read: no
|
||||
@ -424,7 +423,6 @@ sendfile: no
|
||||
sendpage: no
|
||||
get_unmapped_area: no
|
||||
check_flags: no
|
||||
dir_notify: no
|
||||
|
||||
->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek
|
||||
implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
|
||||
|
91
Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
Normal file
91
Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
|
||||
|
||||
BTRFS
|
||||
=====
|
||||
|
||||
Btrfs is a new copy on write filesystem for Linux aimed at
|
||||
implementing advanced features while focusing on fault tolerance,
|
||||
repair and easy administration. Initially developed by Oracle, Btrfs
|
||||
is licensed under the GPL and open for contribution from anyone.
|
||||
|
||||
Linux has a wealth of filesystems to choose from, but we are facing a
|
||||
number of challenges with scaling to the large storage subsystems that
|
||||
are becoming common in today's data centers. Filesystems need to scale
|
||||
in their ability to address and manage large storage, and also in
|
||||
their ability to detect, repair and tolerate errors in the data stored
|
||||
on disk. Btrfs is under heavy development, and is not suitable for
|
||||
any uses other than benchmarking and review. The Btrfs disk format is
|
||||
not yet finalized.
|
||||
|
||||
The main Btrfs features include:
|
||||
|
||||
* Extent based file storage (2^64 max file size)
|
||||
* Space efficient packing of small files
|
||||
* Space efficient indexed directories
|
||||
* Dynamic inode allocation
|
||||
* Writable snapshots
|
||||
* Subvolumes (separate internal filesystem roots)
|
||||
* Object level mirroring and striping
|
||||
* Checksums on data and metadata (multiple algorithms available)
|
||||
* Compression
|
||||
* Integrated multiple device support, with several raid algorithms
|
||||
* Online filesystem check (not yet implemented)
|
||||
* Very fast offline filesystem check
|
||||
* Efficient incremental backup and FS mirroring (not yet implemented)
|
||||
* Online filesystem defragmentation
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAILING LIST
|
||||
============
|
||||
|
||||
There is a Btrfs mailing list hosted on vger.kernel.org. You can
|
||||
find details on how to subscribe here:
|
||||
|
||||
http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-btrfs
|
||||
|
||||
Mailing list archives are available from gmane:
|
||||
|
||||
http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.file-systems.btrfs
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IRC
|
||||
===
|
||||
|
||||
Discussion of Btrfs also occurs on the #btrfs channel of the Freenode
|
||||
IRC network.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
UTILITIES
|
||||
=========
|
||||
|
||||
Userspace tools for creating and manipulating Btrfs file systems are
|
||||
available from the git repository at the following location:
|
||||
|
||||
http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/mason/btrfs-progs-unstable.git
|
||||
git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mason/btrfs-progs-unstable.git
|
||||
|
||||
These include the following tools:
|
||||
|
||||
mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem
|
||||
|
||||
btrfsctl: control program to create snapshots and subvolumes:
|
||||
|
||||
mount /dev/sda2 /mnt
|
||||
btrfsctl -s new_subvol_name /mnt
|
||||
btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_default /mnt/default
|
||||
btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_new_subvol /mnt/new_subvol_name
|
||||
btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_a_snapshot /mnt/snapshot_of_new_subvol
|
||||
ls /mnt
|
||||
default snapshot_of_a_snapshot snapshot_of_new_subvol
|
||||
new_subvol_name snapshot_of_default
|
||||
|
||||
Snapshots and subvolumes cannot be deleted right now, but you can
|
||||
rm -rf all the files and directories inside them.
|
||||
|
||||
btrfsck: do a limited check of the FS extent trees.
|
||||
|
||||
btrfs-debug-tree: print all of the FS metadata in text form. Example:
|
||||
|
||||
btrfs-debug-tree /dev/sda2 >& big_output_file
|
132
Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt
Normal file
132
Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
|
||||
|
||||
To support containers, we now allow multiple instances of devpts filesystem,
|
||||
such that indices of ptys allocated in one instance are independent of indices
|
||||
allocated in other instances of devpts.
|
||||
|
||||
To preserve backward compatibility, this support for multiple instances is
|
||||
enabled only if:
|
||||
|
||||
- CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y, and
|
||||
- '-o newinstance' mount option is specified while mounting devpts
|
||||
|
||||
IOW, devpts now supports both single-instance and multi-instance semantics.
|
||||
|
||||
If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=n, there is no change in behavior and
|
||||
this referred to as the "legacy" mode. In this mode, the new mount options
|
||||
(-o newinstance and -o ptmxmode) will be ignored with a 'bogus option' message
|
||||
on console.
|
||||
|
||||
If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and devpts is mounted without the
|
||||
'newinstance' option (as in current start-up scripts) the new mount binds
|
||||
to the initial kernel mount of devpts. This mode is referred to as the
|
||||
'single-instance' mode and the current, single-instance semantics are
|
||||
preserved, i.e PTYs are common across the system.
|
||||
|
||||
The only difference between this single-instance mode and the legacy mode
|
||||
is the presence of new, '/dev/pts/ptmx' node with permissions 0000, which
|
||||
can safely be ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and 'newinstance' option is specified,
|
||||
the mount is considered to be in the multi-instance mode and a new instance
|
||||
of the devpts fs is created. Any ptys created in this instance are independent
|
||||
of ptys in other instances of devpts. Like in the single-instance mode, the
|
||||
/dev/pts/ptmx node is present. To effectively use the multi-instance mode,
|
||||
open of /dev/ptmx must be a redirected to '/dev/pts/ptmx' using a symlink or
|
||||
bind-mount.
|
||||
|
||||
Eg: A container startup script could do the following:
|
||||
|
||||
$ chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx
|
||||
$ rm /dev/ptmx
|
||||
$ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
|
||||
$ ns_exec -cm /bin/bash
|
||||
|
||||
# We are now in new container
|
||||
|
||||
$ umount /dev/pts
|
||||
$ mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts
|
||||
$ sshd -p 1234
|
||||
|
||||
where 'ns_exec -cm /bin/bash' calls clone() with CLONE_NEWNS flag and execs
|
||||
/bin/bash in the child process. A pty created by the sshd is not visible in
|
||||
the original mount of /dev/pts.
|
||||
|
||||
User-space changes
|
||||
------------------
|
||||
|
||||
In multi-instance mode (i.e '-o newinstance' mount option is specified at least
|
||||
once), following user-space issues should be noted.
|
||||
|
||||
1. If -o newinstance mount option is never used, /dev/pts/ptmx can be ignored
|
||||
and no change is needed to system-startup scripts.
|
||||
|
||||
2. To effectively use multi-instance mode (i.e -o newinstance is specified)
|
||||
administrators or startup scripts should "redirect" open of /dev/ptmx to
|
||||
/dev/pts/ptmx using either a bind mount or symlink.
|
||||
|
||||
$ mount -t devpts -o newinstance devpts /dev/pts
|
||||
|
||||
followed by either
|
||||
|
||||
$ rm /dev/ptmx
|
||||
$ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
|
||||
$ chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx
|
||||
or
|
||||
$ mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
|
||||
|
||||
3. The '/dev/ptmx -> pts/ptmx' symlink is the preferred method since it
|
||||
enables better error-reporting and treats both single-instance and
|
||||
multi-instance mounts similarly.
|
||||
|
||||
But this method requires that system-startup scripts set the mode of
|
||||
/dev/pts/ptmx correctly (default mode is 0000). The scripts can set the
|
||||
mode by, either
|
||||
|
||||
- adding ptmxmode mount option to devpts entry in /etc/fstab, or
|
||||
- using 'chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx'
|
||||
|
||||
4. If multi-instance mode mount is needed for containers, but the system
|
||||
startup scripts have not yet been updated, container-startup scripts
|
||||
should bind mount /dev/ptmx to /dev/pts/ptmx to avoid breaking single-
|
||||
instance mounts.
|
||||
|
||||
Or, in general, container-startup scripts should use:
|
||||
|
||||
mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0666 devpts /dev/pts
|
||||
if [ ! -L /dev/ptmx ]; then
|
||||
mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
|
||||
fi
|
||||
|
||||
When all devpts mounts are multi-instance, /dev/ptmx can permanently be
|
||||
a symlink to pts/ptmx and the bind mount can be ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
5. A multi-instance mount that is not accompanied by the /dev/ptmx to
|
||||
/dev/pts/ptmx redirection would result in an unusable/unreachable pty.
|
||||
|
||||
mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts
|
||||
|
||||
immediately followed by:
|
||||
|
||||
open("/dev/ptmx")
|
||||
|
||||
would create a pty, say /dev/pts/7, in the initial kernel mount.
|
||||
But /dev/pts/7 would be invisible in the new mount.
|
||||
|
||||
6. The permissions for /dev/pts/ptmx node should be specified when mounting
|
||||
/dev/pts, using the '-o ptmxmode=%o' mount option (default is 0000).
|
||||
|
||||
mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0644 devpts /dev/pts
|
||||
|
||||
The permissions can be later be changed as usual with 'chmod'.
|
||||
|
||||
chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx
|
||||
|
||||
7. A mount of devpts without the 'newinstance' option results in binding to
|
||||
initial kernel mount. This behavior while preserving legacy semantics,
|
||||
does not provide strict isolation in a container environment. i.e by
|
||||
mounting devpts without the 'newinstance' option, a container could
|
||||
get visibility into the 'host' or root container's devpts.
|
||||
|
||||
To workaround this and have strict isolation, all mounts of devpts,
|
||||
including the mount in the root container, should use the newinstance
|
||||
option.
|
@ -58,13 +58,22 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
|
||||
|
||||
# mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever
|
||||
|
||||
- When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that
|
||||
ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.
|
||||
So when comparing with a metadata-only journalling filesystem, such
|
||||
as ext3, use `mount -o data=writeback'. And you might as well use
|
||||
`mount -o nobh' too along with it. Making the journal larger than
|
||||
the mke2fs default often helps performance with metadata-intensive
|
||||
workloads.
|
||||
- When comparing performance with other filesystems, it's always
|
||||
important to try multiple workloads; very often a subtle change in a
|
||||
workload parameter can completely change the ranking of which
|
||||
filesystems do well compared to others. When comparing versus ext3,
|
||||
note that ext4 enables write barriers by default, while ext3 does
|
||||
not enable write barriers by default. So it is useful to use
|
||||
explicitly specify whether barriers are enabled or not when via the
|
||||
'-o barriers=[0|1]' mount option for both ext3 and ext4 filesystems
|
||||
for a fair comparison. When tuning ext3 for best benchmark numbers,
|
||||
it is often worthwhile to try changing the data journaling mode; '-o
|
||||
data=writeback,nobh' can be faster for some workloads. (Note
|
||||
however that running mounted with data=writeback can potentially
|
||||
leave stale data exposed in recently written files in case of an
|
||||
unclean shutdown, which could be a security exposure in some
|
||||
situations.) Configuring the filesystem with a large journal can
|
||||
also be helpful for metadata-intensive workloads.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Features
|
||||
===========
|
||||
@ -74,7 +83,7 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
|
||||
* ability to use filesystems > 16TB (e2fsprogs support not available yet)
|
||||
* extent format reduces metadata overhead (RAM, IO for access, transactions)
|
||||
* extent format more robust in face of on-disk corruption due to magics,
|
||||
* internal redunancy in tree
|
||||
* internal redundancy in tree
|
||||
* improved file allocation (multi-block alloc)
|
||||
* fix 32000 subdirectory limit
|
||||
* nsec timestamps for mtime, atime, ctime, create time
|
||||
@ -116,10 +125,11 @@ grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here:
|
||||
When mounting an ext4 filesystem, the following option are accepted:
|
||||
(*) == default
|
||||
|
||||
extents (*) ext4 will use extents to address file data. The
|
||||
file system will no longer be mountable by ext3.
|
||||
|
||||
noextents ext4 will not use extents for newly created files
|
||||
ro Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will
|
||||
replay the journal (and thus write to the
|
||||
partition) even when mounted "read only". The
|
||||
mount options "ro,noload" can be used to prevent
|
||||
writes to the filesystem.
|
||||
|
||||
journal_checksum Enable checksumming of the journal transactions.
|
||||
This will allow the recovery code in e2fsck and the
|
||||
@ -134,17 +144,17 @@ journal_async_commit Commit block can be written to disk without waiting
|
||||
journal=update Update the ext4 file system's journal to the current
|
||||
format.
|
||||
|
||||
journal=inum When a journal already exists, this option is ignored.
|
||||
Otherwise, it specifies the number of the inode which
|
||||
will represent the ext4 file system's journal file.
|
||||
|
||||
journal_dev=devnum When the external journal device's major/minor numbers
|
||||
have changed, this option allows the user to specify
|
||||
the new journal location. The journal device is
|
||||
identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded
|
||||
in devnum.
|
||||
|
||||
noload Don't load the journal on mounting.
|
||||
noload Don't load the journal on mounting. Note that
|
||||
if the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly,
|
||||
skipping the journal replay will lead to the
|
||||
filesystem containing inconsistencies that can
|
||||
lead to any number of problems.
|
||||
|
||||
data=journal All data are committed into the journal prior to being
|
||||
written into the main file system.
|
||||
@ -219,9 +229,12 @@ minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix.
|
||||
|
||||
debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog.
|
||||
|
||||
errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
|
||||
errors=remount-ro Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
|
||||
errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error.
|
||||
errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
|
||||
(These mount options override the errors behavior
|
||||
specified in the superblock, which can be configured
|
||||
using tune2fs)
|
||||
|
||||
data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs
|
||||
in a file data buffer in ordered mode.
|
||||
@ -261,6 +274,42 @@ delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time.
|
||||
nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation
|
||||
when data is copied from user to page cache.
|
||||
|
||||
max_batch_time=usec Maximum amount of time ext4 should wait for
|
||||
additional filesystem operations to be batch
|
||||
together with a synchronous write operation.
|
||||
Since a synchronous write operation is going to
|
||||
force a commit and then a wait for the I/O
|
||||
complete, it doesn't cost much, and can be a
|
||||
huge throughput win, we wait for a small amount
|
||||
of time to see if any other transactions can
|
||||
piggyback on the synchronous write. The
|
||||
algorithm used is designed to automatically tune
|
||||
for the speed of the disk, by measuring the
|
||||
amount of time (on average) that it takes to
|
||||
finish committing a transaction. Call this time
|
||||
the "commit time". If the time that the
|
||||
transactoin has been running is less than the
|
||||
commit time, ext4 will try sleeping for the
|
||||
commit time to see if other operations will join
|
||||
the transaction. The commit time is capped by
|
||||
the max_batch_time, which defaults to 15000us
|
||||
(15ms). This optimization can be turned off
|
||||
entirely by setting max_batch_time to 0.
|
||||
|
||||
min_batch_time=usec This parameter sets the commit time (as
|
||||
described above) to be at least min_batch_time.
|
||||
It defaults to zero microseconds. Increasing
|
||||
this parameter may improve the throughput of
|
||||
multi-threaded, synchronous workloads on very
|
||||
fast disks, at the cost of increasing latency.
|
||||
|
||||
journal_ioprio=prio The I/O priority (from 0 to 7, where 0 is the
|
||||
highest priorty) which should be used for I/O
|
||||
operations submitted by kjournald2 during a
|
||||
commit operation. This defaults to 3, which is
|
||||
a slightly higher priority than the default I/O
|
||||
priority.
|
||||
|
||||
Data Mode
|
||||
=========
|
||||
There are 3 different data modes:
|
||||
|
@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ the fdtable structure -
|
||||
5. Handling of the file structures is special. Since the look-up
|
||||
of the fd (fget()/fget_light()) are lock-free, it is possible
|
||||
that look-up may race with the last put() operation on the
|
||||
file structure. This is avoided using atomic_inc_not_zero()
|
||||
file structure. This is avoided using atomic_long_inc_not_zero()
|
||||
on ->f_count :
|
||||
|
||||
rcu_read_lock();
|
||||
file = fcheck_files(files, fd);
|
||||
if (file) {
|
||||
if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count))
|
||||
if (atomic_long_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count))
|
||||
*fput_needed = 1;
|
||||
else
|
||||
/* Didn't get the reference, someone's freed */
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ the fdtable structure -
|
||||
....
|
||||
return file;
|
||||
|
||||
atomic_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or
|
||||
atomic_long_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or
|
||||
goes to zero during increment. If it does, we fail
|
||||
fget()/fget_light().
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -31,7 +31,6 @@ Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
|
||||
- quotas
|
||||
- Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY)
|
||||
- Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease)
|
||||
- POSIX ACLs
|
||||
|
||||
Mount options
|
||||
=============
|
||||
@ -79,3 +78,5 @@ inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at
|
||||
bits of significance.
|
||||
user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes.
|
||||
nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes.
|
||||
acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
|
||||
noacl (*) Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
|
||||
|
@ -140,6 +140,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc
|
||||
statm Process memory status information
|
||||
status Process status in human readable form
|
||||
wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan
|
||||
stack Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE
|
||||
smaps Extension based on maps, the rss size for each mapped file
|
||||
..............................................................................
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1339,10 +1340,13 @@ nmi_watchdog
|
||||
|
||||
Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is non-zero
|
||||
the NMI watchdog is enabled and will continuously test all online cpus to
|
||||
determine whether or not they are still functioning properly.
|
||||
determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Currently,
|
||||
passing "nmi_watchdog=" parameter at boot time is required for this function
|
||||
to work.
|
||||
|
||||
Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI
|
||||
watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
|
||||
If LAPIC NMI watchdog method is in use (nmi_watchdog=2 kernel parameter), the
|
||||
NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile. By disabling the NMI watchdog,
|
||||
oprofile may have more registers to utilize.
|
||||
|
||||
msgmni
|
||||
------
|
||||
@ -1367,268 +1371,8 @@ auto_msgmni default value is 1.
|
||||
2.4 /proc/sys/vm - The virtual memory subsystem
|
||||
-----------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
The files in this directory can be used to tune the operation of the virtual
|
||||
memory (VM) subsystem of the Linux kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
vfs_cache_pressure
|
||||
------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim the memory which is used for
|
||||
caching of directory and inode objects.
|
||||
|
||||
At the default value of vfs_cache_pressure=100 the kernel will attempt to
|
||||
reclaim dentries and inodes at a "fair" rate with respect to pagecache and
|
||||
swapcache reclaim. Decreasing vfs_cache_pressure causes the kernel to prefer
|
||||
to retain dentry and inode caches. Increasing vfs_cache_pressure beyond 100
|
||||
causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes.
|
||||
|
||||
dirty_background_ratio
|
||||
----------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
|
||||
pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
|
||||
pages at which the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out
|
||||
dirty data.
|
||||
|
||||
dirty_ratio
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
|
||||
Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
|
||||
pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
|
||||
pages at which a process which is generating disk writes will itself start
|
||||
writing out dirty data.
|
||||
|
||||
dirty_writeback_centisecs
|
||||
-------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
The pdflush writeback daemons will periodically wake up and write `old' data
|
||||
out to disk. This tunable expresses the interval between those wakeups, in
|
||||
100'ths of a second.
|
||||
|
||||
Setting this to zero disables periodic writeback altogether.
|
||||
|
||||
dirty_expire_centisecs
|
||||
----------------------
|
||||
|
||||
This tunable is used to define when dirty data is old enough to be eligible
|
||||
for writeout by the pdflush daemons. It is expressed in 100'ths of a second.
|
||||
Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this interval will be
|
||||
written out next time a pdflush daemon wakes up.
|
||||
|
||||
highmem_is_dirtyable
|
||||
--------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Only present if CONFIG_HIGHMEM is set.
|
||||
|
||||
This defaults to 0 (false), meaning that the ratios set above are calculated
|
||||
as a percentage of lowmem only. This protects against excessive scanning
|
||||
in page reclaim, swapping and general VM distress.
|
||||
|
||||
Setting this to 1 can be useful on 32 bit machines where you want to make
|
||||
random changes within an MMAPed file that is larger than your available
|
||||
lowmem without causing large quantities of random IO. Is is safe if the
|
||||
behavior of all programs running on the machine is known and memory will
|
||||
not be otherwise stressed.
|
||||
|
||||
legacy_va_layout
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
If non-zero, this sysctl disables the new 32-bit mmap mmap layout - the kernel
|
||||
will use the legacy (2.4) layout for all processes.
|
||||
|
||||
lowmem_reserve_ratio
|
||||
---------------------
|
||||
|
||||
For some specialised workloads on highmem machines it is dangerous for
|
||||
the kernel to allow process memory to be allocated from the "lowmem"
|
||||
zone. This is because that memory could then be pinned via the mlock()
|
||||
system call, or by unavailability of swapspace.
|
||||
|
||||
And on large highmem machines this lack of reclaimable lowmem memory
|
||||
can be fatal.
|
||||
|
||||
So the Linux page allocator has a mechanism which prevents allocations
|
||||
which _could_ use highmem from using too much lowmem. This means that
|
||||
a certain amount of lowmem is defended from the possibility of being
|
||||
captured into pinned user memory.
|
||||
|
||||
(The same argument applies to the old 16 megabyte ISA DMA region. This
|
||||
mechanism will also defend that region from allocations which could use
|
||||
highmem or lowmem).
|
||||
|
||||
The `lowmem_reserve_ratio' tunable determines how aggressive the kernel is
|
||||
in defending these lower zones.
|
||||
|
||||
If you have a machine which uses highmem or ISA DMA and your
|
||||
applications are using mlock(), or if you are running with no swap then
|
||||
you probably should change the lowmem_reserve_ratio setting.
|
||||
|
||||
The lowmem_reserve_ratio is an array. You can see them by reading this file.
|
||||
-
|
||||
% cat /proc/sys/vm/lowmem_reserve_ratio
|
||||
256 256 32
|
||||
-
|
||||
Note: # of this elements is one fewer than number of zones. Because the highest
|
||||
zone's value is not necessary for following calculation.
|
||||
|
||||
But, these values are not used directly. The kernel calculates # of protection
|
||||
pages for each zones from them. These are shown as array of protection pages
|
||||
in /proc/zoneinfo like followings. (This is an example of x86-64 box).
|
||||
Each zone has an array of protection pages like this.
|
||||
|
||||
-
|
||||
Node 0, zone DMA
|
||||
pages free 1355
|
||||
min 3
|
||||
low 3
|
||||
high 4
|
||||
:
|
||||
:
|
||||
numa_other 0
|
||||
protection: (0, 2004, 2004, 2004)
|
||||
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
|
||||
pagesets
|
||||
cpu: 0 pcp: 0
|
||||
:
|
||||
-
|
||||
These protections are added to score to judge whether this zone should be used
|
||||
for page allocation or should be reclaimed.
|
||||
|
||||
In this example, if normal pages (index=2) are required to this DMA zone and
|
||||
pages_high is used for watermark, the kernel judges this zone should not be
|
||||
used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
|
||||
(4 + 2004 = 2008). If this protection value is 0, this zone would be used for
|
||||
normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
|
||||
(=0) is used.
|
||||
|
||||
zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
|
||||
|
||||
(i < j):
|
||||
zone[i]->protection[j]
|
||||
= (total sums of present_pages from zone[i+1] to zone[j] on the node)
|
||||
/ lowmem_reserve_ratio[i];
|
||||
(i = j):
|
||||
(should not be protected. = 0;
|
||||
(i > j):
|
||||
(not necessary, but looks 0)
|
||||
|
||||
The default values of lowmem_reserve_ratio[i] are
|
||||
256 (if zone[i] means DMA or DMA32 zone)
|
||||
32 (others).
|
||||
As above expression, they are reciprocal number of ratio.
|
||||
256 means 1/256. # of protection pages becomes about "0.39%" of total present
|
||||
pages of higher zones on the node.
|
||||
|
||||
If you would like to protect more pages, smaller values are effective.
|
||||
The minimum value is 1 (1/1 -> 100%).
|
||||
|
||||
page-cluster
|
||||
------------
|
||||
|
||||
page-cluster controls the number of pages which are written to swap in
|
||||
a single attempt. The swap I/O size.
|
||||
|
||||
It is a logarithmic value - setting it to zero means "1 page", setting
|
||||
it to 1 means "2 pages", setting it to 2 means "4 pages", etc.
|
||||
|
||||
The default value is three (eight pages at a time). There may be some
|
||||
small benefits in tuning this to a different value if your workload is
|
||||
swap-intensive.
|
||||
|
||||
overcommit_memory
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
|
||||
Controls overcommit of system memory, possibly allowing processes
|
||||
to allocate (but not use) more memory than is actually available.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
0 - Heuristic overcommit handling. Obvious overcommits of
|
||||
address space are refused. Used for a typical system. It
|
||||
ensures a seriously wild allocation fails while allowing
|
||||
overcommit to reduce swap usage. root is allowed to
|
||||
allocate slightly more memory in this mode. This is the
|
||||
default.
|
||||
|
||||
1 - Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific
|
||||
applications.
|
||||
|
||||
2 - Don't overcommit. The total address space commit
|
||||
for the system is not permitted to exceed swap plus a
|
||||
configurable percentage (default is 50) of physical RAM.
|
||||
Depending on the percentage you use, in most situations
|
||||
this means a process will not be killed while attempting
|
||||
to use already-allocated memory but will receive errors
|
||||
on memory allocation as appropriate.
|
||||
|
||||
overcommit_ratio
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
Percentage of physical memory size to include in overcommit calculations
|
||||
(see above.)
|
||||
|
||||
Memory allocation limit = swapspace + physmem * (overcommit_ratio / 100)
|
||||
|
||||
swapspace = total size of all swap areas
|
||||
physmem = size of physical memory in system
|
||||
|
||||
nr_hugepages and hugetlb_shm_group
|
||||
----------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
nr_hugepages configures number of hugetlb page reserved for the system.
|
||||
|
||||
hugetlb_shm_group contains group id that is allowed to create SysV shared
|
||||
memory segment using hugetlb page.
|
||||
|
||||
hugepages_treat_as_movable
|
||||
--------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
This parameter is only useful when kernelcore= is specified at boot time to
|
||||
create ZONE_MOVABLE for pages that may be reclaimed or migrated. Huge pages
|
||||
are not movable so are not normally allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. A non-zero
|
||||
value written to hugepages_treat_as_movable allows huge pages to be allocated
|
||||
from ZONE_MOVABLE.
|
||||
|
||||
Once enabled, the ZONE_MOVABLE is treated as an area of memory the huge
|
||||
pages pool can easily grow or shrink within. Assuming that applications are
|
||||
not running that mlock() a lot of memory, it is likely the huge pages pool
|
||||
can grow to the size of ZONE_MOVABLE by repeatedly entering the desired value
|
||||
into nr_hugepages and triggering page reclaim.
|
||||
|
||||
laptop_mode
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
laptop_mode is a knob that controls "laptop mode". All the things that are
|
||||
controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
block_dump
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
|
||||
information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
swap_token_timeout
|
||||
------------------
|
||||
|
||||
This file contains valid hold time of swap out protection token. The Linux
|
||||
VM has token based thrashing control mechanism and uses the token to prevent
|
||||
unnecessary page faults in thrashing situation. The unit of the value is
|
||||
second. The value would be useful to tune thrashing behavior.
|
||||
|
||||
drop_caches
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
Writing to this will cause the kernel to drop clean caches, dentries and
|
||||
inodes from memory, causing that memory to become free.
|
||||
|
||||
To free pagecache:
|
||||
echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
|
||||
To free dentries and inodes:
|
||||
echo 2 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
|
||||
To free pagecache, dentries and inodes:
|
||||
echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
|
||||
|
||||
As this is a non-destructive operation and dirty objects are not freeable, the
|
||||
user should run `sync' first.
|
||||
Please see: Documentation/sysctls/vm.txt for a description of these
|
||||
entries.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2.5 /proc/sys/dev - Device specific parameters
|
||||
|
225
Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt
Normal file
225
Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
|
||||
SQUASHFS 4.0 FILESYSTEM
|
||||
=======================
|
||||
|
||||
Squashfs is a compressed read-only filesystem for Linux.
|
||||
It uses zlib compression to compress files, inodes and directories.
|
||||
Inodes in the system are very small and all blocks are packed to minimise
|
||||
data overhead. Block sizes greater than 4K are supported up to a maximum
|
||||
of 1Mbytes (default block size 128K).
|
||||
|
||||
Squashfs is intended for general read-only filesystem use, for archival
|
||||
use (i.e. in cases where a .tar.gz file may be used), and in constrained
|
||||
block device/memory systems (e.g. embedded systems) where low overhead is
|
||||
needed.
|
||||
|
||||
Mailing list: squashfs-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
|
||||
Web site: www.squashfs.org
|
||||
|
||||
1. FILESYSTEM FEATURES
|
||||
----------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Squashfs filesystem features versus Cramfs:
|
||||
|
||||
Squashfs Cramfs
|
||||
|
||||
Max filesystem size: 2^64 16 MiB
|
||||
Max file size: ~ 2 TiB 16 MiB
|
||||
Max files: unlimited unlimited
|
||||
Max directories: unlimited unlimited
|
||||
Max entries per directory: unlimited unlimited
|
||||
Max block size: 1 MiB 4 KiB
|
||||
Metadata compression: yes no
|
||||
Directory indexes: yes no
|
||||
Sparse file support: yes no
|
||||
Tail-end packing (fragments): yes no
|
||||
Exportable (NFS etc.): yes no
|
||||
Hard link support: yes no
|
||||
"." and ".." in readdir: yes no
|
||||
Real inode numbers: yes no
|
||||
32-bit uids/gids: yes no
|
||||
File creation time: yes no
|
||||
Xattr and ACL support: no no
|
||||
|
||||
Squashfs compresses data, inodes and directories. In addition, inode and
|
||||
directory data are highly compacted, and packed on byte boundaries. Each
|
||||
compressed inode is on average 8 bytes in length (the exact length varies on
|
||||
file type, i.e. regular file, directory, symbolic link, and block/char device
|
||||
inodes have different sizes).
|
||||
|
||||
2. USING SQUASHFS
|
||||
-----------------
|
||||
|
||||
As squashfs is a read-only filesystem, the mksquashfs program must be used to
|
||||
create populated squashfs filesystems. This and other squashfs utilities
|
||||
can be obtained from http://www.squashfs.org. Usage instructions can be
|
||||
obtained from this site also.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3. SQUASHFS FILESYSTEM DESIGN
|
||||
-----------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
A squashfs filesystem consists of seven parts, packed together on a byte
|
||||
alignment:
|
||||
|
||||
---------------
|
||||
| superblock |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| datablocks |
|
||||
| & fragments |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| inode table |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| directory |
|
||||
| table |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| fragment |
|
||||
| table |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| export |
|
||||
| table |
|
||||
|---------------|
|
||||
| uid/gid |
|
||||
| lookup table |
|
||||
---------------
|
||||
|
||||
Compressed data blocks are written to the filesystem as files are read from
|
||||
the source directory, and checked for duplicates. Once all file data has been
|
||||
written the completed inode, directory, fragment, export and uid/gid lookup
|
||||
tables are written.
|
||||
|
||||
3.1 Inodes
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
Metadata (inodes and directories) are compressed in 8Kbyte blocks. Each
|
||||
compressed block is prefixed by a two byte length, the top bit is set if the
|
||||
block is uncompressed. A block will be uncompressed if the -noI option is set,
|
||||
or if the compressed block was larger than the uncompressed block.
|
||||
|
||||
Inodes are packed into the metadata blocks, and are not aligned to block
|
||||
boundaries, therefore inodes overlap compressed blocks. Inodes are identified
|
||||
by a 48-bit number which encodes the location of the compressed metadata block
|
||||
containing the inode, and the byte offset into that block where the inode is
|
||||
placed (<block, offset>).
|
||||
|
||||
To maximise compression there are different inodes for each file type
|
||||
(regular file, directory, device, etc.), the inode contents and length
|
||||
varying with the type.
|
||||
|
||||
To further maximise compression, two types of regular file inode and
|
||||
directory inode are defined: inodes optimised for frequently occurring
|
||||
regular files and directories, and extended types where extra
|
||||
information has to be stored.
|
||||
|
||||
3.2 Directories
|
||||
---------------
|
||||
|
||||
Like inodes, directories are packed into compressed metadata blocks, stored
|
||||
in a directory table. Directories are accessed using the start address of
|
||||
the metablock containing the directory and the offset into the
|
||||
decompressed block (<block, offset>).
|
||||
|
||||
Directories are organised in a slightly complex way, and are not simply
|
||||
a list of file names. The organisation takes advantage of the
|
||||
fact that (in most cases) the inodes of the files will be in the same
|
||||
compressed metadata block, and therefore, can share the start block.
|
||||
Directories are therefore organised in a two level list, a directory
|
||||
header containing the shared start block value, and a sequence of directory
|
||||
entries, each of which share the shared start block. A new directory header
|
||||
is written once/if the inode start block changes. The directory
|
||||
header/directory entry list is repeated as many times as necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
Directories are sorted, and can contain a directory index to speed up
|
||||
file lookup. Directory indexes store one entry per metablock, each entry
|
||||
storing the index/filename mapping to the first directory header
|
||||
in each metadata block. Directories are sorted in alphabetical order,
|
||||
and at lookup the index is scanned linearly looking for the first filename
|
||||
alphabetically larger than the filename being looked up. At this point the
|
||||
location of the metadata block the filename is in has been found.
|
||||
The general idea of the index is ensure only one metadata block needs to be
|
||||
decompressed to do a lookup irrespective of the length of the directory.
|
||||
This scheme has the advantage that it doesn't require extra memory overhead
|
||||
and doesn't require much extra storage on disk.
|
||||
|
||||
3.3 File data
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
Regular files consist of a sequence of contiguous compressed blocks, and/or a
|
||||
compressed fragment block (tail-end packed block). The compressed size
|
||||
of each datablock is stored in a block list contained within the
|
||||
file inode.
|
||||
|
||||
To speed up access to datablocks when reading 'large' files (256 Mbytes or
|
||||
larger), the code implements an index cache that caches the mapping from
|
||||
block index to datablock location on disk.
|
||||
|
||||
The index cache allows Squashfs to handle large files (up to 1.75 TiB) while
|
||||
retaining a simple and space-efficient block list on disk. The cache
|
||||
is split into slots, caching up to eight 224 GiB files (128 KiB blocks).
|
||||
Larger files use multiple slots, with 1.75 TiB files using all 8 slots.
|
||||
The index cache is designed to be memory efficient, and by default uses
|
||||
16 KiB.
|
||||
|
||||
3.4 Fragment lookup table
|
||||
-------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Regular files can contain a fragment index which is mapped to a fragment
|
||||
location on disk and compressed size using a fragment lookup table. This
|
||||
fragment lookup table is itself stored compressed into metadata blocks.
|
||||
A second index table is used to locate these. This second index table for
|
||||
speed of access (and because it is small) is read at mount time and cached
|
||||
in memory.
|
||||
|
||||
3.5 Uid/gid lookup table
|
||||
------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
For space efficiency regular files store uid and gid indexes, which are
|
||||
converted to 32-bit uids/gids using an id look up table. This table is
|
||||
stored compressed into metadata blocks. A second index table is used to
|
||||
locate these. This second index table for speed of access (and because it
|
||||
is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
|
||||
|
||||
3.6 Export table
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
|
||||
To enable Squashfs filesystems to be exportable (via NFS etc.) filesystems
|
||||
can optionally (disabled with the -no-exports Mksquashfs option) contain
|
||||
an inode number to inode disk location lookup table. This is required to
|
||||
enable Squashfs to map inode numbers passed in filehandles to the inode
|
||||
location on disk, which is necessary when the export code reinstantiates
|
||||
expired/flushed inodes.
|
||||
|
||||
This table is stored compressed into metadata blocks. A second index table is
|
||||
used to locate these. This second index table for speed of access (and because
|
||||
it is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4. TODOS AND OUTSTANDING ISSUES
|
||||
-------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
4.1 Todo list
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
Implement Xattr and ACL support. The Squashfs 4.0 filesystem layout has hooks
|
||||
for these but the code has not been written. Once the code has been written
|
||||
the existing layout should not require modification.
|
||||
|
||||
4.2 Squashfs internal cache
|
||||
---------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Blocks in Squashfs are compressed. To avoid repeatedly decompressing
|
||||
recently accessed data Squashfs uses two small metadata and fragment caches.
|
||||
|
||||
The cache is not used for file datablocks, these are decompressed and cached in
|
||||
the page-cache in the normal way. The cache is used to temporarily cache
|
||||
fragment and metadata blocks which have been read as a result of a metadata
|
||||
(i.e. inode or directory) or fragment access. Because metadata and fragments
|
||||
are packed together into blocks (to gain greater compression) the read of a
|
||||
particular piece of metadata or fragment will retrieve other metadata/fragments
|
||||
which have been packed with it, these because of locality-of-reference may be
|
||||
read in the near future. Temporarily caching them ensures they are available
|
||||
for near future access without requiring an additional read and decompress.
|
||||
|
||||
In the future this internal cache may be replaced with an implementation which
|
||||
uses the kernel page cache. Because the page cache operates on page sized
|
||||
units this may introduce additional complexity in terms of locking and
|
||||
associated race conditions.
|
@ -95,6 +95,9 @@ no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to
|
||||
of this option is that corruption of the contents
|
||||
of a file can go unnoticed.
|
||||
chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes
|
||||
compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none"
|
||||
compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo"
|
||||
compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Quick usage instructions
|
||||
|
@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ struct super_operations {
|
||||
void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
|
||||
void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
|
||||
int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
|
||||
int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
|
||||
void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
|
||||
@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ or bottom half).
|
||||
a superblock. The second parameter indicates whether the method
|
||||
should wait until the write out has been completed. Optional.
|
||||
|
||||
write_super_lockfs: called when VFS is locking a filesystem and
|
||||
freeze_fs: called when VFS is locking a filesystem and
|
||||
forcing it into a consistent state. This method is currently
|
||||
used by the Logical Volume Manager (LVM).
|
||||
|
||||
unlockfs: called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable
|
||||
unfreeze_fs: called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable
|
||||
again.
|
||||
|
||||
statfs: called when the VFS needs to get filesystem statistics. This
|
||||
@ -733,7 +733,6 @@ struct file_operations {
|
||||
ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t, loff_t *, int);
|
||||
unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
|
||||
int (*check_flags)(int);
|
||||
int (*dir_notify)(struct file *filp, unsigned long arg);
|
||||
int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
|
||||
ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, size_t, unsigned int);
|
||||
ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int);
|
||||
@ -800,8 +799,6 @@ otherwise noted.
|
||||
|
||||
check_flags: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_SETFL command
|
||||
|
||||
dir_notify: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_NOTIFY command
|
||||
|
||||
flock: called by the flock(2) system call
|
||||
|
||||
splice_write: called by the VFS to splice data from a pipe to a file. This
|
||||
@ -931,7 +928,7 @@ manipulate dentries:
|
||||
d_lookup: look up a dentry given its parent and path name component
|
||||
It looks up the child of that given name from the dcache
|
||||
hash table. If it is found, the reference count is incremented
|
||||
and the dentry is returned. The caller must use d_put()
|
||||
and the dentry is returned. The caller must use dput()
|
||||
to free the dentry when it finishes using it.
|
||||
|
||||
For further information on dentry locking, please refer to the document
|
||||
|
@ -229,10 +229,6 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem:
|
||||
ISGID bit is cleared if the irix_sgid_inherit compatibility sysctl
|
||||
is set.
|
||||
|
||||
fs.xfs.restrict_chown (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1)
|
||||
Controls whether unprivileged users can use chown to "give away"
|
||||
a file to another user.
|
||||
|
||||
fs.xfs.inherit_sync (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1)
|
||||
Setting this to "1" will cause the "sync" flag set
|
||||
by the xfs_io(8) chattr command on a directory to be
|
||||
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
|
||||
tracer is not adding more data, they will display
|
||||
the same information every time they are read.
|
||||
|
||||
iter_ctrl: This file lets the user control the amount of data
|
||||
trace_options: This file lets the user control the amount of data
|
||||
that is displayed in one of the above output
|
||||
files.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
|
||||
only be recorded if the latency is greater than
|
||||
the value in this file. (in microseconds)
|
||||
|
||||
trace_entries: This sets or displays the number of bytes each CPU
|
||||
buffer_size_kb: This sets or displays the number of kilobytes each CPU
|
||||
buffer can hold. The tracer buffers are the same size
|
||||
for each CPU. The displayed number is the size of the
|
||||
CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The
|
||||
CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The
|
||||
trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory
|
||||
that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size).
|
||||
If the last page allocated has room for more bytes
|
||||
@ -127,6 +127,8 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
|
||||
be traced. If a function exists in both set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
and set_ftrace_notrace, the function will _not_ be traced.
|
||||
|
||||
set_ftrace_pid: Have the function tracer only trace a single thread.
|
||||
|
||||
available_filter_functions: This lists the functions that ftrace
|
||||
has processed and can trace. These are the function
|
||||
names that you can pass to "set_ftrace_filter" or
|
||||
@ -316,23 +318,23 @@ The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers.
|
||||
The rest is the same as the 'trace' file.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
iter_ctrl
|
||||
---------
|
||||
trace_options
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
The iter_ctrl file is used to control what gets printed in the trace
|
||||
The trace_options file is used to control what gets printed in the trace
|
||||
output. To see what is available, simply cat the file:
|
||||
|
||||
cat /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
|
||||
cat /debug/tracing/trace_options
|
||||
print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \
|
||||
noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree
|
||||
noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree nouserstacktrace nosym-userobj
|
||||
|
||||
To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with "no".
|
||||
|
||||
echo noprint-parent > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
|
||||
echo noprint-parent > /debug/tracing/trace_options
|
||||
|
||||
To enable an option, leave off the "no".
|
||||
|
||||
echo sym-offset > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl
|
||||
echo sym-offset > /debug/tracing/trace_options
|
||||
|
||||
Here are the available options:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -378,6 +380,20 @@ Here are the available options:
|
||||
When a trace is recorded, so is the stack of functions.
|
||||
This allows for back traces of trace sites.
|
||||
|
||||
userstacktrace - This option changes the trace.
|
||||
It records a stacktrace of the current userspace thread.
|
||||
|
||||
sym-userobj - when user stacktrace are enabled, look up which object the
|
||||
address belongs to, and print a relative address
|
||||
This is especially useful when ASLR is on, otherwise you don't
|
||||
get a chance to resolve the address to object/file/line after the app is no
|
||||
longer running
|
||||
|
||||
The lookup is performed when you read trace,trace_pipe,latency_trace. Example:
|
||||
|
||||
a.out-1623 [000] 40874.465068: /root/a.out[+0x480] <-/root/a.out[+0
|
||||
x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6]
|
||||
|
||||
sched-tree - TBD (any users??)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1059,6 +1075,83 @@ For simple one time traces, the above is sufficent. For anything else,
|
||||
a search through /proc/mounts may be needed to find where the debugfs
|
||||
file-system is mounted.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Single thread tracing
|
||||
---------------------
|
||||
|
||||
By writing into /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid you can trace a
|
||||
single thread. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid
|
||||
no pid
|
||||
# echo 3111 > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid
|
||||
3111
|
||||
# echo function > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace | head
|
||||
# tracer: function
|
||||
#
|
||||
# TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION
|
||||
# | | | | |
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254676: finish_task_switch <-thread_return
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254681: hrtimer_cancel <-schedule_hrtimeout_range
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254682: hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254683: lock_hrtimer_base <-hrtimer_try_to_cancel
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254685: fget_light <-do_sys_poll
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254686: pipe_poll <-do_sys_poll
|
||||
# echo -1 > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace |head
|
||||
# tracer: function
|
||||
#
|
||||
# TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION
|
||||
# | | | | |
|
||||
##### CPU 3 buffer started ####
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957688: free_poll_entry <-poll_freewait
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957689: remove_wait_queue <-free_poll_entry
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957691: fput <-free_poll_entry
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957692: audit_syscall_exit <-sysret_audit
|
||||
yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957693: path_put <-audit_syscall_exit
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to trace a function when executing, you could use
|
||||
something like this simple program:
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdio.h>
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include <sys/types.h>
|
||||
#include <sys/stat.h>
|
||||
#include <fcntl.h>
|
||||
#include <unistd.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int main (int argc, char **argv)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (argc < 1)
|
||||
exit(-1);
|
||||
|
||||
if (fork() > 0) {
|
||||
int fd, ffd;
|
||||
char line[64];
|
||||
int s;
|
||||
|
||||
ffd = open("/debug/tracing/current_tracer", O_WRONLY);
|
||||
if (ffd < 0)
|
||||
exit(-1);
|
||||
write(ffd, "nop", 3);
|
||||
|
||||
fd = open("/debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid", O_WRONLY);
|
||||
s = sprintf(line, "%d\n", getpid());
|
||||
write(fd, line, s);
|
||||
|
||||
write(ffd, "function", 8);
|
||||
|
||||
close(fd);
|
||||
close(ffd);
|
||||
|
||||
execvp(argv[1], argv+1);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
dynamic ftrace
|
||||
--------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1158,7 +1251,11 @@ These are the only wild cards which are supported.
|
||||
|
||||
<match>*<match> will not work.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo hrtimer_* > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
Note: It is better to use quotes to enclose the wild cards, otherwise
|
||||
the shell may expand the parameters into names of files in the local
|
||||
directory.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 'hrtimer_*' > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
|
||||
Produces:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1213,7 +1310,7 @@ Again, now we want to append.
|
||||
# echo sys_nanosleep > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
sys_nanosleep
|
||||
# echo hrtimer_* >> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
# echo 'hrtimer_*' >> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter
|
||||
hrtimer_run_queues
|
||||
hrtimer_run_pending
|
||||
@ -1299,41 +1396,29 @@ trace entries
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
Having too much or not enough data can be troublesome in diagnosing
|
||||
an issue in the kernel. The file trace_entries is used to modify
|
||||
an issue in the kernel. The file buffer_size_kb is used to modify
|
||||
the size of the internal trace buffers. The number listed
|
||||
is the number of entries that can be recorded per CPU. To know
|
||||
the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUS with the
|
||||
number of entries.
|
||||
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
65620
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb
|
||||
1408 (units kilobytes)
|
||||
|
||||
Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that,
|
||||
echo "nop" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set
|
||||
to "nop", an EINVAL error will be returned.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer
|
||||
# echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
100045
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Notice that we echoed in 100,000 but the size is 100,045. The entries
|
||||
are held in individual pages. It allocates the number of pages it takes
|
||||
to fulfill the request. If more entries may fit on the last page
|
||||
then they will be added.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 1 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
85
|
||||
|
||||
This shows us that 85 entries can fit in a single page.
|
||||
# echo 10000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb
|
||||
10000 (units kilobytes)
|
||||
|
||||
The number of pages which will be allocated is limited to a percentage
|
||||
of available memory. Allocating too much will produce an error.
|
||||
|
||||
# echo 1000000000000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
# echo 1000000000000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb
|
||||
-bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries
|
||||
# cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb
|
||||
85
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ a sensor.
|
||||
Notice that some banks have both a read and a write address this is how the
|
||||
uGuru determines if a read from or a write to the bank is taking place, thus
|
||||
when reading you should always use the read address and when writing the
|
||||
write address. The write address is always one (1) more then the read address.
|
||||
write address. The write address is always one (1) more than the read address.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
uGuru ready
|
||||
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Once all bytes have been read data will hold 0x09, but there is no reason to
|
||||
test for this. Notice that the number of bytes is bank address dependent see
|
||||
above and below.
|
||||
|
||||
After completing a successfull read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
|
||||
After completing a successful read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
|
||||
ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
|
||||
if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
|
||||
algorithm described above will still work.
|
||||
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ don't ask why this is the way it is.
|
||||
|
||||
Once DATA holds 0x01 read CMD it should hold 0xAC now.
|
||||
|
||||
After completing a successfull write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
|
||||
After completing a successful write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
|
||||
ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
|
||||
if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
|
||||
algorithm described above will still work.
|
||||
@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW)
|
||||
Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold (R)
|
||||
Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold (R)
|
||||
Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold (R)
|
||||
Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW)
|
||||
Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds (RW)
|
||||
Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold (RW)
|
||||
|
||||
* This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
|
||||
@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Byte 0:
|
||||
Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
|
||||
Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold (RW)
|
||||
Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW)
|
||||
Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW)
|
||||
Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds (RW)
|
||||
|
||||
Byte 1:
|
||||
min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
|
||||
|
@ -31,15 +31,11 @@ Each of the measured inputs (temperature, fan speed) has corresponding high/low
|
||||
limit values. The ADT7470 will signal an ALARM if any measured value exceeds
|
||||
either limit.
|
||||
|
||||
The ADT7470 DOES NOT sample all inputs continuously. A single pin on the
|
||||
ADT7470 is connected to a multitude of thermal diodes, but the chip must be
|
||||
instructed explicitly to read the multitude of diodes. If you want to use
|
||||
automatic fan control mode, you must manually read any of the temperature
|
||||
sensors or the fan control algorithm will not run. The chip WILL NOT DO THIS
|
||||
AUTOMATICALLY; this must be done from userspace. This may be a bug in the chip
|
||||
design, given that many other AD chips take care of this. The driver will not
|
||||
read the registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further,
|
||||
configuration data is only read once per minute.
|
||||
The ADT7470 samples all inputs continuously. A kernel thread is started up for
|
||||
the purpose of periodically querying the temperature sensors, thus allowing the
|
||||
automatic fan pwm control to set the fan speed. The driver will not read the
|
||||
registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further, configuration data is
|
||||
only read once per minute.
|
||||
|
||||
Special Features
|
||||
----------------
|
||||
@ -72,5 +68,6 @@ pwm#_auto_point2_temp.
|
||||
Notes
|
||||
-----
|
||||
|
||||
As stated above, the temperature inputs must be read periodically from
|
||||
userspace in order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run.
|
||||
The temperature inputs no longer need to be read periodically from userspace in
|
||||
order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run. This was the case for earlier
|
||||
versions of the driver.
|
||||
|
87
Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
Normal file
87
Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
|
||||
This describes the interface for the ADT7475 driver:
|
||||
|
||||
(there are 4 fans, numbered fan1 to fan4):
|
||||
|
||||
fanX_input Read the current speed of the fan (in RPMs)
|
||||
fanX_min Read/write the minimum speed of the fan. Dropping
|
||||
below this sets an alarm.
|
||||
|
||||
(there are three PWMs, numbered pwm1 to pwm3):
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX Read/write the current duty cycle of the PWM. Writes
|
||||
only have effect when auto mode is turned off (see
|
||||
below). Range is 0 - 255.
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX_enable Fan speed control method:
|
||||
|
||||
0 - No control (fan at full speed)
|
||||
1 - Manual fan speed control (using pwm[1-*])
|
||||
2 - Automatic fan speed control
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX_auto_channels_temp Select which channels affect this PWM
|
||||
|
||||
1 - TEMP1 controls PWM
|
||||
2 - TEMP2 controls PWM
|
||||
4 - TEMP3 controls PWM
|
||||
6 - TEMP2 and TEMP3 control PWM
|
||||
7 - All three inputs control PWM
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX_freq Read/write the PWM frequency in Hz. The number
|
||||
should be one of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
11 Hz
|
||||
14 Hz
|
||||
22 Hz
|
||||
29 Hz
|
||||
35 Hz
|
||||
44 Hz
|
||||
58 Hz
|
||||
88 Hz
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX_auto_point1_pwm Read/write the minimum PWM duty cycle in automatic mode
|
||||
|
||||
pwmX_auto_point2_pwm Read/write the maximum PWM duty cycle in automatic mode
|
||||
|
||||
(there are three temperature settings numbered temp1 to temp3):
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_input Read the current temperature. The value is in milli
|
||||
degrees of Celsius.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_max Read/write the upper temperature limit - exceeding this
|
||||
will cause an alarm.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_min Read/write the lower temperature limit - exceeding this
|
||||
will cause an alarm.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_offset Read/write the temperature adjustment offset
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_crit Read/write the THERM limit for remote1.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_crit_hyst Set the temperature value below crit where the
|
||||
fans will stay on - this helps drive the temperature
|
||||
low enough so it doesn't stay near the edge and
|
||||
cause THERM to keep tripping.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_auto_point1_temp Read/write the minimum temperature where the fans will
|
||||
turn on in automatic mode.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_auto_point2_temp Read/write the maximum temperature over which the fans
|
||||
will run in automatic mode. tempX_auto_point1_temp
|
||||
and tempX_auto_point2_temp together define the
|
||||
range of automatic control.
|
||||
|
||||
tempX_alarm Read a 1 if the max/min alarm is set
|
||||
tempX_fault Read a 1 if either temp1 or temp3 diode has a fault
|
||||
|
||||
(There are two voltage settings, in1 and in2):
|
||||
|
||||
inX_input Read the current voltage on VCC. Value is in
|
||||
millivolts.
|
||||
|
||||
inX_min read/write the minimum voltage limit.
|
||||
Dropping below this causes an alarm.
|
||||
|
||||
inX_max read/write the maximum voltage limit.
|
||||
Exceeding this causes an alarm.
|
||||
|
||||
inX_alarm Read a 1 if the max/min alarm is set.
|
89
Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
Normal file
89
Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
|
||||
Kernel driver f71882fg
|
||||
======================
|
||||
|
||||
Supported chips:
|
||||
* Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG
|
||||
Prefix: 'f71882fg'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
|
||||
Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
|
||||
* Fintek F71862FG and F71863FG
|
||||
Prefix: 'f71862fg'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
|
||||
Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
|
||||
* Fintek F8000
|
||||
Prefix: 'f8000'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
|
||||
Datasheet: Not public
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring
|
||||
capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and
|
||||
3 temperature sensors.
|
||||
|
||||
These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in
|
||||
three different modes (one manual, two automatic).
|
||||
|
||||
The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, which seems
|
||||
reasonable.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Monitoring
|
||||
----------
|
||||
|
||||
The Voltage, Fan and Temperature Monitoring uses the standard sysfs
|
||||
interface as documented in sysfs-interface, without any exceptions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Fan Control
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
Both PWM (pulse-width modulation) and DC fan speed control methods are
|
||||
supported. The right one to use depends on external circuitry on the
|
||||
motherboard, so the driver assumes that the BIOS set the method
|
||||
properly.
|
||||
|
||||
There are 2 modes to specify the speed of the fan, PWM duty cycle (or DC
|
||||
voltage) mode, where 0-100% duty cycle (0-100% of 12V) is specified. And RPM
|
||||
mode where the actual RPM of the fan (as measured) is controlled and the speed
|
||||
gets specified as 0-100% of the fan#_full_speed file.
|
||||
|
||||
Since both modes work in a 0-100% (mapped to 0-255) scale, there isn't a
|
||||
whole lot of a difference when modifying fan control settings. The only
|
||||
important difference is that in RPM mode the 0-100% controls the fan speed
|
||||
between 0-100% of fan#_full_speed. It is assumed that if the BIOS programs
|
||||
RPM mode, it will also set fan#_full_speed properly, if it does not then
|
||||
fan control will not work properly, unless you set a sane fan#_full_speed
|
||||
value yourself.
|
||||
|
||||
Switching between these modes requires re-initializing a whole bunch of
|
||||
registers, so the mode which the BIOS has set is kept. The mode is
|
||||
printed when loading the driver.
|
||||
|
||||
Three different fan control modes are supported; the mode number is written
|
||||
to the pwm#_enable file. Note that not all modes are supported on all
|
||||
chips, and some modes may only be available in RPM / PWM mode on the F8000.
|
||||
Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error.
|
||||
|
||||
* 1: Manual mode
|
||||
You ask for a specific PWM duty cycle / DC voltage or a specific % of
|
||||
fan#_full_speed by writing to the pwm# file. This mode is only
|
||||
available on the F8000 if the fan channel is in RPM mode.
|
||||
|
||||
* 2: Normal auto mode
|
||||
You can define a number of temperature/fan speed trip points, which % the
|
||||
fan should run at at this temp and which temp a fan should follow using the
|
||||
standard sysfs interface. The number and type of trip points is chip
|
||||
depended, see which files are available in sysfs.
|
||||
Fan/PWM channel 3 of the F8000 is always in this mode!
|
||||
|
||||
* 3: Thermostat mode (Only available on the F8000 when in duty cycle mode)
|
||||
The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between
|
||||
temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp.
|
||||
|
||||
Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to
|
||||
fan2 and pwm3 to fan3.
|
@ -26,6 +26,10 @@ Supported chips:
|
||||
Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
|
||||
http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0.2.zip
|
||||
http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0%203_(for%20C%20version).zip
|
||||
* IT8720F
|
||||
Prefix: 'it8720'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
|
||||
Datasheet: Not yet publicly available.
|
||||
* SiS950 [clone of IT8705F]
|
||||
Prefix: 'it87'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
|
||||
@ -71,7 +75,7 @@ Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F,
|
||||
IT8718F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips.
|
||||
IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips.
|
||||
|
||||
These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports,
|
||||
joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they
|
||||
@ -84,19 +88,19 @@ the IT8716F and late IT8712F have 6. They are shared with other functions
|
||||
though, so the functionality may not be available on a given system.
|
||||
The driver dumbly assume it is there.
|
||||
|
||||
The IT8718F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value is
|
||||
stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations,
|
||||
The IT8718F and IT8720F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value
|
||||
is stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations,
|
||||
this value can currently only be read once at initialization time, so
|
||||
the driver won't notice and report changes in the VID value. The two
|
||||
upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you
|
||||
can't have both on a given board.
|
||||
|
||||
The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
|
||||
The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
|
||||
2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver.
|
||||
|
||||
The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional
|
||||
16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan
|
||||
clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
|
||||
The IT8716F, IT8718F and IT8720F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have
|
||||
optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more
|
||||
fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
|
||||
revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one
|
||||
of the above chips is detected.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -122,7 +126,7 @@ zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
|
||||
inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of
|
||||
0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers.
|
||||
|
||||
The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F) encode the core voltage value:
|
||||
The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value:
|
||||
the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by
|
||||
the mainboard and/or processor itself. It is a value in volts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -13,18 +13,21 @@ Author:
|
||||
Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops
|
||||
sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or
|
||||
"HP 3D DriveGuard". It detect automatically laptops with this sensor. Known models
|
||||
(for now the HP 2133, nc6420, nc2510, nc8510, nc84x0, nw9440 and nx9420) will
|
||||
have their axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly
|
||||
play neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via
|
||||
This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP
|
||||
laptops sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data
|
||||
Protection System 3D" or "HP 3D DriveGuard". It detect automatically
|
||||
laptops with this sensor. Known models (for now the HP 2133, nc6420,
|
||||
nc2510, nc8510, nc84x0, nw9440 and nx9420) will have their axis
|
||||
automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play
|
||||
neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via
|
||||
/sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d.
|
||||
|
||||
Sysfs attributes under /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/:
|
||||
position - 3D position that the accelerometer reports. Format: "(x,y,z)"
|
||||
calibrate - read: values (x, y, z) that are used as the base for input class device operation.
|
||||
write: forces the base to be recalibrated with the current position.
|
||||
calibrate - read: values (x, y, z) that are used as the base for input
|
||||
class device operation.
|
||||
write: forces the base to be recalibrated with the current
|
||||
position.
|
||||
rate - reports the sampling rate of the accelerometer device in HZ
|
||||
|
||||
This driver also provides an absolute input class device, allowing
|
||||
@ -39,11 +42,12 @@ the accelerometer are converted into a "standard" organisation of the axes
|
||||
* When the laptop is horizontal the position reported is about 0 for X and Y
|
||||
and a positive value for Z
|
||||
* If the left side is elevated, X increases (becomes positive)
|
||||
* If the front side (where the touchpad is) is elevated, Y decreases (becomes negative)
|
||||
* If the front side (where the touchpad is) is elevated, Y decreases
|
||||
(becomes negative)
|
||||
* If the laptop is put upside-down, Z becomes negative
|
||||
|
||||
If your laptop model is not recognized (cf "dmesg"), you can send an email to the
|
||||
authors to add it to the database. When reporting a new laptop, please include
|
||||
the output of "dmidecode" plus the value of /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/position
|
||||
in these four cases.
|
||||
If your laptop model is not recognized (cf "dmesg"), you can send an
|
||||
email to the authors to add it to the database. When reporting a new
|
||||
laptop, please include the output of "dmidecode" plus the value of
|
||||
/sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/position in these four cases.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
|
||||
Kernel driver lm70
|
||||
==================
|
||||
|
||||
Supported chip:
|
||||
Supported chips:
|
||||
* National Semiconductor LM70
|
||||
Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
|
||||
* Texas Instruments TMP121/TMP123
|
||||
Information: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp121.html
|
||||
|
||||
Author:
|
||||
Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
|
||||
@ -25,6 +27,14 @@ complement digital temperature (sent via the SIO line), is available in the
|
||||
driver for interpretation. This driver makes use of the kernel's in-core
|
||||
SPI support.
|
||||
|
||||
As a real (in-tree) example of this "SPI protocol driver" interfacing
|
||||
with a "SPI master controller driver", see drivers/spi/spi_lm70llp.c
|
||||
and its associated documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
The TMP121/TMP123 are very similar; main differences are 4 wire SPI inter-
|
||||
face (read only) and 13-bit temperature data (0.0625 degrees celsius reso-
|
||||
lution).
|
||||
|
||||
Thanks to
|
||||
---------
|
||||
Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> for mentoring the hwmon-side driver
|
||||
|
@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ configured individually according to the following options.
|
||||
temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
|
||||
|
||||
* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
|
||||
the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
|
||||
the behaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
|
||||
pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag
|
||||
|
81
Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245
Normal file
81
Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
|
||||
Kernel driver ltc4245
|
||||
=====================
|
||||
|
||||
Supported chips:
|
||||
* Linear Technology LTC4245
|
||||
Prefix: 'ltc4245'
|
||||
Addresses scanned: 0x20-0x3f
|
||||
Datasheet:
|
||||
http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1140,P19392,D13517
|
||||
|
||||
Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Description
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
The LTC4245 controller allows a board to be safely inserted and removed
|
||||
from a live backplane in multiple supply systems such as CompactPCI and
|
||||
PCI Express.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Usage Notes
|
||||
-----------
|
||||
|
||||
This driver does not probe for LTC4245 devices, due to the fact that some
|
||||
of the possible addresses are unfriendly to probing. You will need to use
|
||||
the "force" parameter to tell the driver where to find the device.
|
||||
|
||||
Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4245 at address 0x23
|
||||
on I2C bus #1:
|
||||
$ modprobe ltc4245 force=1,0x23
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Sysfs entries
|
||||
-------------
|
||||
|
||||
The LTC4245 has built-in limits for over and under current warnings. This
|
||||
makes it very likely that the reference circuit will be used.
|
||||
|
||||
This driver uses the values in the datasheet to change the register values
|
||||
into the values specified in the sysfs-interface document. The current readings
|
||||
rely on the sense resistors listed in Table 2: "Sense Resistor Values".
|
||||
|
||||
in1_input 12v input voltage (mV)
|
||||
in2_input 5v input voltage (mV)
|
||||
in3_input 3v input voltage (mV)
|
||||
in4_input Vee (-12v) input voltage (mV)
|
||||
|
||||
in1_min_alarm 12v input undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in2_min_alarm 5v input undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in3_min_alarm 3v input undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in4_min_alarm Vee (-12v) input undervoltage alarm
|
||||
|
||||
curr1_input 12v current (mA)
|
||||
curr2_input 5v current (mA)
|
||||
curr3_input 3v current (mA)
|
||||
curr4_input Vee (-12v) current (mA)
|
||||
|
||||
curr1_max_alarm 12v overcurrent alarm
|
||||
curr2_max_alarm 5v overcurrent alarm
|
||||
curr3_max_alarm 3v overcurrent alarm
|
||||
curr4_max_alarm Vee (-12v) overcurrent alarm
|
||||
|
||||
in5_input 12v output voltage (mV)
|
||||
in6_input 5v output voltage (mV)
|
||||
in7_input 3v output voltage (mV)
|
||||
in8_input Vee (-12v) output voltage (mV)
|
||||
|
||||
in5_min_alarm 12v output undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in6_min_alarm 5v output undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in7_min_alarm 3v output undervoltage alarm
|
||||
in8_min_alarm Vee (-12v) output undervoltage alarm
|
||||
|
||||
in9_input GPIO #1 voltage data
|
||||
in10_input GPIO #2 voltage data
|
||||
in11_input GPIO #3 voltage data
|
||||
|
||||
power1_input 12v power usage (mW)
|
||||
power2_input 5v power usage (mW)
|
||||
power3_input 3v power usage (mW)
|
||||
power4_input Vee (-12v) power usage (mW)
|
@ -11,3 +11,8 @@ unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s)
|
||||
# echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan
|
||||
|
||||
done
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: please make sure that partitions are unmounted and that there are
|
||||
no other active references to devices before doing "delete_devices" step,
|
||||
also do not attempt "scan" step on devices currently in use -- otherwise
|
||||
results may be unpredictable and lead to data loss if you're unlucky
|
||||
|
109
Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt
Normal file
109
Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
|
||||
|
||||
Walkera WK-0701 transmitter is supplied with a ready to fly Walkera
|
||||
helicopters such as HM36, HM37, HM60. The walkera0701 module enables to use
|
||||
this transmitter as joystick
|
||||
|
||||
Devel homepage and download:
|
||||
http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/walkera-wk0701/
|
||||
|
||||
or use cogito:
|
||||
cg-clone http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/GIT/walkera0701-joystick
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Connecting to PC:
|
||||
|
||||
At back side of transmitter S-video connector can be found. Modulation
|
||||
pulses from processor to HF part can be found at pin 2 of this connector,
|
||||
pin 3 is GND. Between pin 3 and CPU 5k6 resistor can be found. To get
|
||||
modulation pulses to PC, signal pulses must be amplified.
|
||||
|
||||
Cable: (walkera TX to parport)
|
||||
|
||||
Walkera WK-0701 TX S-VIDEO connector:
|
||||
(back side of TX)
|
||||
__ __ S-video: canon25
|
||||
/ |_| \ pin 2 (signal) NPN parport
|
||||
/ O 4 3 O \ pin 3 (GND) LED ________________ 10 ACK
|
||||
( O 2 1 O ) | C
|
||||
\ ___ / 2 ________________________|\|_____|/
|
||||
| [___] | |/| B |\
|
||||
------- 3 __________________________________|________________ 25 GND
|
||||
E
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
I use green LED and BC109 NPN transistor.
|
||||
|
||||
Software:
|
||||
|
||||
Build kernel with walkera0701 module. Module walkera0701 need exclusive
|
||||
access to parport, modules like lp must be unloaded before loading
|
||||
walkera0701 module, check dmesg for error messages. Connect TX to PC by
|
||||
cable and run jstest /dev/input/js0 to see values from TX. If no value can
|
||||
be changed by TX "joystick", check output from /proc/interrupts. Value for
|
||||
(usually irq7) parport must increase if TX is on.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Technical details:
|
||||
|
||||
Driver use interrupt from parport ACK input bit to measure pulse length
|
||||
using hrtimers.
|
||||
|
||||
Frame format:
|
||||
Based on walkera WK-0701 PCM Format description by Shaul Eizikovich.
|
||||
(downloaded from http://www.smartpropoplus.com/Docs/Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf)
|
||||
|
||||
Signal pulses:
|
||||
(ANALOG)
|
||||
SYNC BIN OCT
|
||||
+---------+ +------+
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
--+ +------+ +---
|
||||
|
||||
Frame:
|
||||
SYNC , BIN1, OCT1, BIN2, OCT2 ... BIN24, OCT24, BIN25, next frame SYNC ..
|
||||
|
||||
pulse length:
|
||||
Binary values: Analog octal values:
|
||||
|
||||
288 uS Binary 0 318 uS 000
|
||||
438 uS Binary 1 398 uS 001
|
||||
478 uS 010
|
||||
558 uS 011
|
||||
638 uS 100
|
||||
1306 uS SYNC 718 uS 101
|
||||
798 uS 110
|
||||
878 uS 111
|
||||
|
||||
24 bin+oct values + 1 bin value = 24*4+1 bits = 97 bits
|
||||
|
||||
(Warning, pulses on ACK ar inverted by transistor, irq is rised up on sync
|
||||
to bin change or octal value to bin change).
|
||||
|
||||
Binary data representations:
|
||||
|
||||
One binary and octal value can be grouped to nibble. 24 nibbles + one binary
|
||||
values can be sampled between sync pulses.
|
||||
|
||||
Values for first four channels (analog joystick values) can be found in
|
||||
first 10 nibbles. Analog value is represented by one sign bit and 9 bit
|
||||
absolute binary value. (10 bits per channel). Next nibble is checksum for
|
||||
first ten nibbles.
|
||||
|
||||
Next nibbles 12 .. 21 represents four channels (not all channels can be
|
||||
directly controlled from TX). Binary representations ar the same as in first
|
||||
four channels. In nibbles 22 and 23 is a special magic number. Nibble 24 is
|
||||
checksum for nibbles 12..23.
|
||||
|
||||
After last octal value for nibble 24 and next sync pulse one additional
|
||||
binary value can be sampled. This bit and magic number is not used in
|
||||
software driver. Some details about this magic numbers can be found in
|
||||
Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf.
|
||||
|
||||
Checksum calculation:
|
||||
|
||||
Summary of octal values in nibbles must be same as octal value in checksum
|
||||
nibble (only first 3 bits are used). Binary value for checksum nibble is
|
||||
calculated by sum of binary values in checked nibbles + sum of octal values
|
||||
in checked nibbles divided by 8. Only bit 0 of this sum is used.
|
||||
|
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
'B' C0-FF advanced bbus
|
||||
<mailto:maassen@uni-freiburg.de>
|
||||
'C' all linux/soundcard.h
|
||||
'D' all asm-s390/dasd.h
|
||||
'D' all arch/s390/include/asm/dasd.h
|
||||
'E' all linux/input.h
|
||||
'F' all linux/fb.h
|
||||
'H' all linux/hiddev.h
|
||||
@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
<http://linux01.gwdg.de/~alatham/ppdd.html>
|
||||
'M' all linux/soundcard.h
|
||||
'N' 00-1F drivers/usb/scanner.h
|
||||
'O' 00-02 include/mtd/ubi-user.h UBI
|
||||
'P' all linux/soundcard.h
|
||||
'Q' all linux/soundcard.h
|
||||
'R' 00-1F linux/random.h
|
||||
@ -104,7 +105,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
'S' 80-81 scsi/scsi_ioctl.h conflict!
|
||||
'S' 82-FF scsi/scsi.h conflict!
|
||||
'T' all linux/soundcard.h conflict!
|
||||
'T' all asm-i386/ioctls.h conflict!
|
||||
'T' all arch/x86/include/asm/ioctls.h conflict!
|
||||
'U' 00-EF linux/drivers/usb/usb.h
|
||||
'V' all linux/vt.h
|
||||
'W' 00-1F linux/watchdog.h conflict!
|
||||
@ -119,7 +120,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
<mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl>
|
||||
'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict!
|
||||
'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict!
|
||||
'c' 80-9F asm-s390/chsc.h
|
||||
'c' 80-9F arch/s390/include/asm/chsc.h
|
||||
'd' 00-FF linux/char/drm/drm/h conflict!
|
||||
'd' 00-DF linux/video_decoder.h conflict!
|
||||
'd' F0-FF linux/digi1.h
|
||||
@ -142,6 +143,9 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
'n' 00-7F linux/ncp_fs.h
|
||||
'n' E0-FF video/matrox.h matroxfb
|
||||
'o' 00-1F fs/ocfs2/ocfs2_fs.h OCFS2
|
||||
'o' 00-03 include/mtd/ubi-user.h conflict! (OCFS2 and UBI overlaps)
|
||||
'o' 40-41 include/mtd/ubi-user.h UBI
|
||||
'o' 01-A1 include/linux/dvb/*.h DVB
|
||||
'p' 00-0F linux/phantom.h conflict! (OpenHaptics needs this)
|
||||
'p' 00-3F linux/mc146818rtc.h conflict!
|
||||
'p' 40-7F linux/nvram.h
|
||||
@ -166,7 +170,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
|
||||
<mailto:oe@port.de>
|
||||
0x80 00-1F linux/fb.h
|
||||
0x81 00-1F linux/videotext.h
|
||||
0x89 00-06 asm-i386/sockios.h
|
||||
0x89 00-06 arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h
|
||||
0x89 0B-DF linux/sockios.h
|
||||
0x89 E0-EF linux/sockios.h SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range
|
||||
0x89 F0-FF linux/sockios.h SIOCDEVPRIVATE range
|
||||
|
@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
|
||||
00-INDEX
|
||||
- this file: info on the kernel build process
|
||||
- this file: info on the kernel build process
|
||||
kbuild.txt
|
||||
- developer information on kbuild
|
||||
kconfig.txt
|
||||
- usage help for make *config
|
||||
kconfig-language.txt
|
||||
- specification of Config Language, the language in Kconfig files
|
||||
makefiles.txt
|
||||
|
133
Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
Normal file
133
Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
|
||||
Environment variables
|
||||
|
||||
KCPPFLAGS
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Additional options to pass when preprocessing. The preprocessing options
|
||||
will be used in all cases where kbuild do preprocessing including
|
||||
building C files and assembler files.
|
||||
|
||||
KAFLAGS
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Additional options to the assembler.
|
||||
|
||||
KCFLAGS
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Additional options to the C compiler.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_VERBOSE
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assinged same values as "V=...".
|
||||
See make help for the full list.
|
||||
Setting "V=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_VERBOSE.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_EXTMOD
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Set the directory to look for the kernel source when building external
|
||||
modules.
|
||||
The directory can be specified in several ways:
|
||||
1) Use "M=..." on the command line
|
||||
2) Environmnet variable KBUILD_EXTMOD
|
||||
3) Environmnet variable SUBDIRS
|
||||
The possibilities are listed in the order they take precedence.
|
||||
Using "M=..." will always override the others.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_OUTPUT
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Specify the output directory when building the kernel.
|
||||
The output directory can also be specificed using "O=...".
|
||||
Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT
|
||||
|
||||
ARCH
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Set ARCH to the architecture to be built.
|
||||
In most cases the name of the architecture is the same as the
|
||||
directory name found in the arch/ directory.
|
||||
But some architectures suach as x86 and sparc has aliases.
|
||||
x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit
|
||||
sparc: sparc for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit
|
||||
|
||||
CROSS_COMPILE
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Specify an optional fixed part of the binutils filename.
|
||||
CROSS_COMPILE can be a part of the filename or the full path.
|
||||
|
||||
CROSS_COMPILE is also used for ccache is some setups.
|
||||
|
||||
CF
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Additional options for sparse.
|
||||
CF is often used on the command-line like this:
|
||||
|
||||
make CF=-Wbitwise C=2
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL_PATH
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
INSTALL_PATH specifies where to place the updated kernel and system map
|
||||
images. Default is /boot, but you can set it to other values
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MODLIB
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
Specify where to install modules.
|
||||
The default value is:
|
||||
|
||||
$(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)
|
||||
|
||||
The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL_MOD_PATH
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
INSTALL_MOD_PATH specifies a prefix to MODLIB for module directory
|
||||
relocations required by build roots. This is not defined in the
|
||||
makefile but the argument can be passed to make if needed.
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be
|
||||
stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then
|
||||
the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise,
|
||||
INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command.
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL_FW_PATH
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
INSTALL_FW_PATH specify where to install the firmware blobs.
|
||||
The default value is:
|
||||
|
||||
$(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/firmware
|
||||
|
||||
The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL_HDR_PATH
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
INSTALL_HDR_PATH specify where to install user space headers when
|
||||
executing "make headers_*".
|
||||
The default value is:
|
||||
|
||||
$(objtree)/usr
|
||||
|
||||
$(objtree) is the directory where output files are saved.
|
||||
The output directory is often set using "O=..." on the commandline.
|
||||
|
||||
The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN can be set to avoid error out in case of undefined
|
||||
symbols in the final module linking stage.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_MODPOST_FINAL
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL can be set to skip the final link of modules.
|
||||
This is solely usefull to speed up test compiles.
|
||||
|
||||
KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
For modules use symbols from another modules.
|
||||
See more details in modules.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
ALLSOURCE_ARCHS
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
For tags/TAGS/cscope targets, you can specify more than one archs
|
||||
to be included in the databases, separated by blankspace. e.g.
|
||||
|
||||
$ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS="x86 mips arm" tags
|
188
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
Normal file
188
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
|
||||
This file contains some assistance for using "make *config".
|
||||
|
||||
Use "make help" to list all of the possible configuration targets.
|
||||
|
||||
The xconfig ('qconf') and menuconfig ('mconf') programs also
|
||||
have embedded help text. Be sure to check it for navigation,
|
||||
search, and other general help text.
|
||||
|
||||
======================================================================
|
||||
General
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
New kernel releases often introduce new config symbols. Often more
|
||||
important, new kernel releases may rename config symbols. When
|
||||
this happens, using a previously working .config file and running
|
||||
"make oldconfig" won't necessarily produce a working new kernel
|
||||
for you, so you may find that you need to see what NEW kernel
|
||||
symbols have been introduced.
|
||||
|
||||
To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use
|
||||
|
||||
cp user/some/old.config .config
|
||||
yes "" | make oldconfig >conf.new
|
||||
|
||||
and the config program will list as (NEW) any new symbols that have
|
||||
unknown values. Of course, the .config file is also updated with
|
||||
new (default) values, so you can use:
|
||||
|
||||
grep "(NEW)" conf.new
|
||||
|
||||
to see the new config symbols or you can 'diff' the previous and
|
||||
new .config files to see the differences:
|
||||
|
||||
diff .config.old .config | less
|
||||
|
||||
(Yes, we need something better here.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
======================================================================
|
||||
menuconfig
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
SEARCHING for CONFIG symbols
|
||||
|
||||
Searching in menuconfig:
|
||||
|
||||
The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol
|
||||
names, so you have to know something close to what you are
|
||||
looking for.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
/hotplug
|
||||
This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug",
|
||||
e.g., HOTPLUG, HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG.
|
||||
|
||||
For search help, enter / followed TAB-TAB-TAB (to highlight
|
||||
<Help>) and Enter. This will tell you that you can also use
|
||||
regular expressions (regexes) in the search string, so if you
|
||||
are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try
|
||||
|
||||
/^hotplug
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
______________________________________________________________________
|
||||
Color Themes for 'menuconfig'
|
||||
|
||||
It is possible to select different color themes using the variable
|
||||
MENUCONFIG_COLOR. To select a theme use:
|
||||
|
||||
make MENUCONFIG_COLOR=<theme> menuconfig
|
||||
|
||||
Available themes are:
|
||||
mono => selects colors suitable for monochrome displays
|
||||
blackbg => selects a color scheme with black background
|
||||
classic => theme with blue background. The classic look
|
||||
bluetitle => a LCD friendly version of classic. (default)
|
||||
|
||||
______________________________________________________________________
|
||||
Environment variables in 'menuconfig'
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
(partially based on lkml email from/by Rob Landley, re: miniconfig)
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can
|
||||
also use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a
|
||||
filename that contains config symbols that the user requires to be
|
||||
set to a specific value. If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a
|
||||
filename, "make *config" checks for a file named
|
||||
"all{yes/mod/no/random}.config" (corresponding to the *config command
|
||||
that was used) for symbol values that are to be forced. If this file
|
||||
is not found, it checks for a file named "all.config" to contain forced
|
||||
values.
|
||||
|
||||
This enables you to create "miniature" config (miniconfig) or custom
|
||||
config files containing just the config symbols that you are interested
|
||||
in. Then the kernel config system generates the full .config file,
|
||||
including dependencies of your miniconfig file, based on the miniconfig
|
||||
file.
|
||||
|
||||
This 'KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG' file is a config file which contains
|
||||
(usually a subset of all) preset config symbols. These variable
|
||||
settings are still subject to normal dependency checks.
|
||||
|
||||
Examples:
|
||||
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=custom-notebook.config make allnoconfig
|
||||
or
|
||||
KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config make allnoconfig
|
||||
or
|
||||
make KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config allnoconfig
|
||||
|
||||
These examples will disable most options (allnoconfig) but enable or
|
||||
disable the options that are explicitly listed in the specified
|
||||
mini-config files.
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
|
||||
config udpates (requires explicit updates).
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_CONFIG
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
This environment variable can be used to specify a default kernel config
|
||||
file name to override the default name of ".config".
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not
|
||||
break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else.
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_NOTIMESTAMP
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
If this environment variable exists and is non-null, the timestamp line
|
||||
in generated .config files is omitted.
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
|
||||
"auto.conf" file. Its default value is "include/config/auto.conf".
|
||||
|
||||
KCONFIG_AUTOHEADER
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
|
||||
"autoconf.h" (header) file. Its default value is "include/linux/autoconf.h".
|
||||
|
||||
______________________________________________________________________
|
||||
menuconfig User Interface Options
|
||||
----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
MENUCONFIG_MODE
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
MENUCONFIG_MODE=single_menu make menuconfig
|
||||
|
||||
======================================================================
|
||||
xconfig
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Searching in xconfig:
|
||||
|
||||
The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol
|
||||
names, so you have to know something close to what you are
|
||||
looking for.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
Ctrl-F hotplug
|
||||
or
|
||||
Menu: File, Search, hotplug
|
||||
|
||||
lists all config symbol entries that contain "hotplug" in
|
||||
the symbol name. In this Search dialog, you may change the
|
||||
config setting for any of the entries that are not grayed out.
|
||||
You can also enter a different search string without having
|
||||
to return to the main menu.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
======================================================================
|
||||
gconfig
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
Searching in gconfig:
|
||||
|
||||
None (gconfig isn't maintained as well as xconfig or menuconfig);
|
||||
however, gconfig does have a few more viewing choices than
|
||||
xconfig does.
|
||||
|
||||
###
|
@ -383,6 +383,20 @@ more details, with real examples.
|
||||
to prerequisites are referenced with $(src) (because they are not
|
||||
generated files).
|
||||
|
||||
$(kecho)
|
||||
echoing information to user in a rule is often a good practice
|
||||
but when execution "make -s" one does not expect to see any output
|
||||
except for warnings/errors.
|
||||
To support this kbuild define $(kecho) which will echo out the
|
||||
text following $(kecho) to stdout except if "make -s" is used.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
#arch/blackfin/boot/Makefile
|
||||
$(obj)/vmImage: $(obj)/vmlinux.gz
|
||||
$(call if_changed,uimage)
|
||||
@$(kecho) 'Kernel: $@ is ready'
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
--- 3.11 $(CC) support functions
|
||||
|
||||
The kernel may be built with several different versions of
|
||||
|
@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ following files:
|
||||
|
||||
# Module specific targets
|
||||
genbin:
|
||||
echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped
|
||||
echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
In example 2, we are down to two fairly simple files and for simple
|
||||
@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ following files:
|
||||
|
||||
# Module specific targets
|
||||
genbin:
|
||||
echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped
|
||||
echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped
|
||||
|
||||
endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -71,6 +71,11 @@ The @argument descriptions must begin on the very next line following
|
||||
this opening short function description line, with no intervening
|
||||
empty comment lines.
|
||||
|
||||
If a function parameter is "..." (varargs), it should be listed in
|
||||
kernel-doc notation as:
|
||||
* @...: description
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Example kernel-doc data structure comment.
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
@ -282,6 +287,32 @@ struct my_struct {
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Including documentation blocks in source files
|
||||
----------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
To facilitate having source code and comments close together, you can
|
||||
include kernel-doc documentation blocks that are free-form comments
|
||||
instead of being kernel-doc for functions, structures, unions,
|
||||
enums, or typedefs. This could be used for something like a
|
||||
theory of operation for a driver or library code, for example.
|
||||
|
||||
This is done by using a DOC: section keyword with a section title. E.g.:
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* DOC: Theory of Operation
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The whizbang foobar is a dilly of a gizmo. It can do whatever you
|
||||
* want it to do, at any time. It reads your mind. Here's how it works.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* foo bar splat
|
||||
*
|
||||
* The only drawback to this gizmo is that is can sometimes damage
|
||||
* hardware, software, or its subject(s).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
DOC: sections are used in SGML templates files as indicated below.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
How to make new SGML template files
|
||||
-----------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
@ -302,6 +333,9 @@ exported using EXPORT_SYMBOL.
|
||||
!F<filename> <function [functions...]> is replaced by the
|
||||
documentation, in <filename>, for the functions listed.
|
||||
|
||||
!P<filename> <section title> is replaced by the contents of the DOC:
|
||||
section titled <section title> from <filename>.
|
||||
Spaces are allowed in <section title>; do not quote the <section title>.
|
||||
|
||||
Tim.
|
||||
*/ <twaugh@redhat.com>
|
||||
|
@ -89,7 +89,9 @@ parameter is applicable:
|
||||
SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled.
|
||||
SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
|
||||
SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
|
||||
FTRACE Function tracing enabled.
|
||||
TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
|
||||
UMS USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
|
||||
USB USB support is enabled.
|
||||
USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
|
||||
V4L Video For Linux support is enabled.
|
||||
@ -139,6 +141,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
ht -- run only enough ACPI to enable Hyper Threading
|
||||
strict -- Be less tolerant of platforms that are not
|
||||
strictly ACPI specification compliant.
|
||||
rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT
|
||||
|
||||
See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
|
||||
|
||||
@ -149,16 +152,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
default: 0
|
||||
|
||||
acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options
|
||||
Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering }
|
||||
See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode.
|
||||
Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig,
|
||||
old_ordering, s4_nonvs }
|
||||
See Documentation/power/video.txt for information on
|
||||
s3_bios and s3_mode.
|
||||
s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep
|
||||
as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called.
|
||||
s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being
|
||||
used during resume from hibernation.
|
||||
old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS
|
||||
control method, wrt putting devices into low power
|
||||
states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is
|
||||
used by default).
|
||||
control method, with respect to putting devices into
|
||||
low power states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering
|
||||
of _PTS is used by default).
|
||||
s4_nonvs prevents the kernel from saving/restoring the
|
||||
ACPI NVS memory during hibernation.
|
||||
|
||||
acpi_sci= [HW,ACPI] ACPI System Control Interrupt trigger mode
|
||||
Format: { level | edge | high | low }
|
||||
@ -193,7 +200,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
acpi_skip_timer_override [HW,ACPI]
|
||||
Recognize and ignore IRQ0/pin2 Interrupt Override.
|
||||
For broken nForce2 BIOS resulting in XT-PIC timer.
|
||||
acpi_use_timer_override [HW,ACPI}
|
||||
acpi_use_timer_override [HW,ACPI]
|
||||
Use timer override. For some broken Nvidia NF5 boards
|
||||
that require a timer override, but don't have
|
||||
HPET
|
||||
@ -468,8 +475,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
clearcpuid=BITNUM [X86]
|
||||
Disable CPUID feature X for the kernel. See
|
||||
include/asm-x86/cpufeature.h for the valid bit numbers.
|
||||
Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily
|
||||
arch/x86/include/asm/cpufeature.h for the valid bit
|
||||
numbers. Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily
|
||||
stable over kernel options, but the vendor specific
|
||||
ones should be.
|
||||
Also note that user programs calling CPUID directly
|
||||
@ -550,6 +557,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
not work reliably with all consoles, but is known
|
||||
to work with serial and VGA consoles.
|
||||
|
||||
coredump_filter=
|
||||
[KNL] Change the default value for
|
||||
/proc/<pid>/coredump_filter.
|
||||
See also Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
cpcihp_generic= [HW,PCI] Generic port I/O CompactPCI driver
|
||||
Format:
|
||||
<first_slot>,<last_slot>,<port>,<enum_bit>[,<debug>]
|
||||
@ -753,6 +765,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
parameter will force ia64_sal_cache_flush to call
|
||||
ia64_pal_cache_flush instead of SAL_CACHE_FLUSH.
|
||||
|
||||
ftrace=[tracer]
|
||||
[ftrace] will set and start the specified tracer
|
||||
as early as possible in order to facilitate early
|
||||
boot debugging.
|
||||
|
||||
ftrace_dump_on_oops
|
||||
[ftrace] will dump the trace buffers on oops.
|
||||
|
||||
gamecon.map[2|3]=
|
||||
[HW,JOY] Multisystem joystick and NES/SNES/PSX pad
|
||||
support via parallel port (up to 5 devices per port)
|
||||
@ -814,6 +834,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
hlt [BUGS=ARM,SH]
|
||||
|
||||
hvc_iucv= [S390] Number of z/VM IUCV hypervisor console (HVC)
|
||||
terminal devices. Valid values: 0..8
|
||||
|
||||
i8042.debug [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode
|
||||
i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
|
||||
i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
|
||||
@ -860,17 +883,19 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
idle= [X86]
|
||||
Format: idle=poll or idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
|
||||
Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly improves the performance
|
||||
of waking up a idle CPU, but will use a lot of power and make the system
|
||||
run hot. Not recommended.
|
||||
idle=mwait. On systems which support MONITOR/MWAIT but the kernel chose
|
||||
to not use it because it doesn't save as much power as a normal idle
|
||||
loop use the MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be the same
|
||||
as idle=poll.
|
||||
idle=halt. Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
|
||||
Format: idle=poll, idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
|
||||
Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly
|
||||
improve the performance of waking up a idle CPU, but
|
||||
will use a lot of power and make the system run hot.
|
||||
Not recommended.
|
||||
idle=mwait: On systems which support MONITOR/MWAIT but
|
||||
the kernel chose to not use it because it doesn't save
|
||||
as much power as a normal idle loop, use the
|
||||
MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be
|
||||
the same as idle=poll.
|
||||
idle=halt: Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
|
||||
In such case C2/C3 won't be used again.
|
||||
idle=nomwait. Disable mwait for CPU C-states
|
||||
idle=nomwait: Disable mwait for CPU C-states
|
||||
|
||||
ide-pci-generic.all-generic-ide [HW] (E)IDE subsystem
|
||||
Claim all unknown PCI IDE storage controllers.
|
||||
@ -901,6 +926,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
inttest= [IA64]
|
||||
|
||||
iomem= Disable strict checking of access to MMIO memory
|
||||
strict regions from userspace.
|
||||
relaxed
|
||||
|
||||
iommu= [x86]
|
||||
off
|
||||
force
|
||||
@ -1052,8 +1081,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
lapic [X86-32,APIC] Enable the local APIC even if BIOS
|
||||
disabled it.
|
||||
|
||||
lapic_timer_c2_ok [X86-32,x86-64,APIC] trust the local apic timer in
|
||||
C2 power state.
|
||||
lapic_timer_c2_ok [X86-32,x86-64,APIC] trust the local apic timer
|
||||
in C2 power state.
|
||||
|
||||
libata.dma= [LIBATA] DMA control
|
||||
libata.dma=0 Disable all PATA and SATA DMA
|
||||
@ -1105,6 +1134,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
If there are multiple matching configurations changing
|
||||
the same attribute, the last one is used.
|
||||
|
||||
lmb=debug [KNL] Enable lmb debug messages.
|
||||
|
||||
load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy
|
||||
See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1396,7 +1427,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
when a NMI is triggered.
|
||||
Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die]
|
||||
|
||||
nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32] Debugging features for SMP kernels
|
||||
nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32,X86-64] Debugging features for SMP kernels
|
||||
Format: [panic,][num]
|
||||
Valid num: 0,1,2
|
||||
0 - turn nmi_watchdog off
|
||||
1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog
|
||||
2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using
|
||||
a performance counter. Note: This will use one performance
|
||||
counter and the local APIC's performance vector.
|
||||
When panic is specified panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs.
|
||||
This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box
|
||||
quickly up again.
|
||||
Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following
|
||||
symbolic names: lapic and ioapic
|
||||
Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic
|
||||
|
||||
no387 [BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths
|
||||
emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor
|
||||
@ -1452,6 +1496,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
instruction doesn't work correctly and not to
|
||||
use it.
|
||||
|
||||
no_file_caps Tells the kernel not to honor file capabilities. The
|
||||
only way then for a file to be executed with privilege
|
||||
is to be setuid root or executed by root.
|
||||
|
||||
nohalt [IA-64] Tells the kernel not to use the power saving
|
||||
function PAL_HALT_LIGHT when idle. This increases
|
||||
power-consumption. On the positive side, it reduces
|
||||
@ -1521,6 +1569,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
nosoftlockup [KNL] Disable the soft-lockup detector.
|
||||
|
||||
noswapaccount [KNL] Disable accounting of swap in memory resource
|
||||
controller. (See Documentation/controllers/memory.txt)
|
||||
|
||||
nosync [HW,M68K] Disables sync negotiation for all devices.
|
||||
|
||||
notsc [BUGS=X86-32] Disable Time Stamp Counter
|
||||
@ -1540,6 +1591,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
nr_uarts= [SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered.
|
||||
|
||||
ohci1394_dma=early [HW] enable debugging via the ohci1394 driver.
|
||||
See Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt for more
|
||||
info.
|
||||
|
||||
olpc_ec_timeout= [OLPC] ms delay when issuing EC commands
|
||||
Rather than timing out after 20 ms if an EC
|
||||
command is not properly ACKed, override the length
|
||||
@ -1629,6 +1684,17 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
nomsi [MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is
|
||||
enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to
|
||||
disable the use of MSI interrupts system-wide.
|
||||
noioapicquirk [APIC] Disable all boot interrupt quirks.
|
||||
Safety option to keep boot IRQs enabled. This
|
||||
should never be necessary.
|
||||
ioapicreroute [APIC] Enable rerouting of boot IRQs to the
|
||||
primary IO-APIC for bridges that cannot disable
|
||||
boot IRQs. This fixes a source of spurious IRQs
|
||||
when the system masks IRQs.
|
||||
noioapicreroute [APIC] Disable workaround that uses the
|
||||
boot IRQ equivalent of an IRQ that connects to
|
||||
a chipset where boot IRQs cannot be disabled.
|
||||
The opposite of ioapicreroute.
|
||||
biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt
|
||||
routing table. These calls are known to be buggy
|
||||
on several machines and they hang the machine
|
||||
@ -1753,10 +1819,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
autoconfiguration.
|
||||
Ranges are in pairs (memory base and size).
|
||||
|
||||
dynamic_printk
|
||||
Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if
|
||||
CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. These can also
|
||||
be switched on/off via <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules
|
||||
dynamic_printk Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if
|
||||
CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled.
|
||||
These can also be switched on/off via
|
||||
<debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules
|
||||
|
||||
print-fatal-signals=
|
||||
[KNL] debug: print fatal signals
|
||||
@ -1844,7 +1910,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
reboot= [BUGS=X86-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode
|
||||
Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]]
|
||||
See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c
|
||||
See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c
|
||||
|
||||
relax_domain_level=
|
||||
[KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level.
|
||||
@ -2168,6 +2234,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
st= [HW,SCSI] SCSI tape parameters (buffers, etc.)
|
||||
See Documentation/scsi/st.txt.
|
||||
|
||||
stacktrace [FTRACE]
|
||||
Enabled the stack tracer on boot up.
|
||||
|
||||
sti= [PARISC,HW]
|
||||
Format: <num>
|
||||
Set the STI (builtin display/keyboard on the HP-PARISC
|
||||
@ -2241,7 +2310,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
|
||||
thermal.psv= [HW,ACPI]
|
||||
-1: disable all passive trip points
|
||||
<degrees C>: override all passive trip points to this value
|
||||
<degrees C>: override all passive trip points to this
|
||||
value
|
||||
|
||||
thermal.tzp= [HW,ACPI]
|
||||
Specify global default ACPI thermal zone polling rate
|
||||
@ -2252,12 +2322,27 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
See comment before function dc390_setup() in
|
||||
drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c.
|
||||
|
||||
topology= [S390]
|
||||
Format: {off | on}
|
||||
Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu
|
||||
topology informations if the hardware supports these.
|
||||
The scheduler will make use of these informations and
|
||||
e.g. base its process migration decisions on it.
|
||||
Default is off.
|
||||
|
||||
tp720= [HW,PS2]
|
||||
|
||||
trix= [HW,OSS] MediaTrix AudioTrix Pro
|
||||
Format:
|
||||
<io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<sb_io>,<sb_irq>,<sb_dma>,<mpu_io>,<mpu_irq>
|
||||
|
||||
tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC.
|
||||
Format: <string>
|
||||
[x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this
|
||||
disables clocksource verification at runtime.
|
||||
Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older
|
||||
hardware, and in virtualized environment.
|
||||
|
||||
turbografx.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY]
|
||||
TurboGraFX parallel port interface
|
||||
Format:
|
||||
@ -2314,6 +2399,41 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
usbhid.mousepoll=
|
||||
[USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
|
||||
|
||||
usb-storage.delay_use=
|
||||
[UMS] The delay in seconds before a new device is
|
||||
scanned for Logical Units (default 5).
|
||||
|
||||
usb-storage.quirks=
|
||||
[UMS] A list of quirks entries to supplement or
|
||||
override the built-in unusual_devs list. List
|
||||
entries are separated by commas. Each entry has
|
||||
the form VID:PID:Flags where VID and PID are Vendor
|
||||
and Product ID values (4-digit hex numbers) and
|
||||
Flags is a set of characters, each corresponding
|
||||
to a common usb-storage quirk flag as follows:
|
||||
a = SANE_SENSE (collect more than 18 bytes
|
||||
of sense data);
|
||||
c = FIX_CAPACITY (decrease the reported
|
||||
device capacity by one sector);
|
||||
h = CAPACITY_HEURISTICS (decrease the
|
||||
reported device capacity by one
|
||||
sector if the number is odd);
|
||||
i = IGNORE_DEVICE (don't bind to this
|
||||
device);
|
||||
l = NOT_LOCKABLE (don't try to lock and
|
||||
unlock ejectable media);
|
||||
m = MAX_SECTORS_64 (don't transfer more
|
||||
than 64 sectors = 32 KB at a time);
|
||||
o = CAPACITY_OK (accept the capacity
|
||||
reported by the device);
|
||||
r = IGNORE_RESIDUE (the device reports
|
||||
bogus residue values);
|
||||
s = SINGLE_LUN (the device has only one
|
||||
Logical Unit);
|
||||
w = NO_WP_DETECT (don't test whether the
|
||||
medium is write-protected).
|
||||
Example: quirks=0419:aaf5:rl,0421:0433:rc
|
||||
|
||||
add_efi_memmap [EFI; x86-32,X86-64] Include EFI memory map in
|
||||
kernel's map of available physical RAM.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2374,8 +2494,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
|
||||
Format:
|
||||
<irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]]
|
||||
|
||||
norandmaps Don't use address space randomization
|
||||
Equivalent to echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space
|
||||
norandmaps Don't use address space randomization. Equivalent to
|
||||
echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space
|
||||
|
||||
______________________________________________________________________
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename():
|
||||
|
||||
int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name);
|
||||
|
||||
Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of
|
||||
what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking
|
||||
kobject_rename does not perform any locking or have a solid notion of
|
||||
what names are valid so the caller must provide their own sanity checking
|
||||
and serialization.
|
||||
|
||||
There is a function called kobject_set_name() but that is legacy cruft and
|
||||
|
@ -497,7 +497,10 @@ The first column provides the kernel address where the probe is inserted.
|
||||
The second column identifies the type of probe (k - kprobe, r - kretprobe
|
||||
and j - jprobe), while the third column specifies the symbol+offset of
|
||||
the probe. If the probed function belongs to a module, the module name
|
||||
is also specified.
|
||||
is also specified. Following columns show probe status. If the probe is on
|
||||
a virtual address that is no longer valid (module init sections, module
|
||||
virtual addresses that correspond to modules that've been unloaded),
|
||||
such probes are marked with [GONE].
|
||||
|
||||
/debug/kprobes/enabled: Turn kprobes ON/OFF
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1475,7 +1475,7 @@ Sysfs interface changelog:
|
||||
|
||||
0x020100: Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling
|
||||
support. If you must, use it to know you should not
|
||||
start an userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when
|
||||
start a userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when
|
||||
NVRAM is compiled out by the user because it is
|
||||
unneeded/undesired in the first place).
|
||||
0x020101: Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling
|
||||
|
@ -481,51 +481,6 @@ static unsigned long load_initrd(const char *name, unsigned long mem)
|
||||
/* We return the initrd size. */
|
||||
return len;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Once we know how much memory we have we can construct simple linear page
|
||||
* tables which set virtual == physical which will get the Guest far enough
|
||||
* into the boot to create its own.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* We lay them out of the way, just below the initrd (which is why we need to
|
||||
* know its size here). */
|
||||
static unsigned long setup_pagetables(unsigned long mem,
|
||||
unsigned long initrd_size)
|
||||
{
|
||||
unsigned long *pgdir, *linear;
|
||||
unsigned int mapped_pages, i, linear_pages;
|
||||
unsigned int ptes_per_page = getpagesize()/sizeof(void *);
|
||||
|
||||
mapped_pages = mem/getpagesize();
|
||||
|
||||
/* Each PTE page can map ptes_per_page pages: how many do we need? */
|
||||
linear_pages = (mapped_pages + ptes_per_page-1)/ptes_per_page;
|
||||
|
||||
/* We put the toplevel page directory page at the top of memory. */
|
||||
pgdir = from_guest_phys(mem) - initrd_size - getpagesize();
|
||||
|
||||
/* Now we use the next linear_pages pages as pte pages */
|
||||
linear = (void *)pgdir - linear_pages*getpagesize();
|
||||
|
||||
/* Linear mapping is easy: put every page's address into the mapping in
|
||||
* order. PAGE_PRESENT contains the flags Present, Writable and
|
||||
* Executable. */
|
||||
for (i = 0; i < mapped_pages; i++)
|
||||
linear[i] = ((i * getpagesize()) | PAGE_PRESENT);
|
||||
|
||||
/* The top level points to the linear page table pages above. */
|
||||
for (i = 0; i < mapped_pages; i += ptes_per_page) {
|
||||
pgdir[i/ptes_per_page]
|
||||
= ((to_guest_phys(linear) + i*sizeof(void *))
|
||||
| PAGE_PRESENT);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
verbose("Linear mapping of %u pages in %u pte pages at %#lx\n",
|
||||
mapped_pages, linear_pages, to_guest_phys(linear));
|
||||
|
||||
/* We return the top level (guest-physical) address: the kernel needs
|
||||
* to know where it is. */
|
||||
return to_guest_phys(pgdir);
|
||||
}
|
||||
/*:*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* Simple routine to roll all the commandline arguments together with spaces
|
||||
@ -548,13 +503,13 @@ static void concat(char *dst, char *args[])
|
||||
|
||||
/*L:185 This is where we actually tell the kernel to initialize the Guest. We
|
||||
* saw the arguments it expects when we looked at initialize() in lguest_user.c:
|
||||
* the base of Guest "physical" memory, the top physical page to allow, the
|
||||
* top level pagetable and the entry point for the Guest. */
|
||||
static int tell_kernel(unsigned long pgdir, unsigned long start)
|
||||
* the base of Guest "physical" memory, the top physical page to allow and the
|
||||
* entry point for the Guest. */
|
||||
static int tell_kernel(unsigned long start)
|
||||
{
|
||||
unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_INITIALIZE,
|
||||
(unsigned long)guest_base,
|
||||
guest_limit / getpagesize(), pgdir, start };
|
||||
guest_limit / getpagesize(), start };
|
||||
int fd;
|
||||
|
||||
verbose("Guest: %p - %p (%#lx)\n",
|
||||
@ -1030,7 +985,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev)
|
||||
/* Zero out the virtqueues. */
|
||||
for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) {
|
||||
memset(vq->vring.desc, 0,
|
||||
vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize()));
|
||||
vring_size(vq->config.num, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN));
|
||||
lg_last_avail(vq) = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
} else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) {
|
||||
@ -1211,7 +1166,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
|
||||
void *p;
|
||||
|
||||
/* First we need some memory for this virtqueue. */
|
||||
pages = (vring_size(num_descs, getpagesize()) + getpagesize() - 1)
|
||||
pages = (vring_size(num_descs, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN) + getpagesize() - 1)
|
||||
/ getpagesize();
|
||||
p = get_pages(pages);
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1228,7 +1183,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs,
|
||||
vq->config.pfn = to_guest_phys(p) / getpagesize();
|
||||
|
||||
/* Initialize the vring. */
|
||||
vring_init(&vq->vring, num_descs, p, getpagesize());
|
||||
vring_init(&vq->vring, num_descs, p, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN);
|
||||
|
||||
/* Append virtqueue to this device's descriptor. We use
|
||||
* device_config() to get the end of the device's current virtqueues;
|
||||
@ -1941,7 +1896,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
||||
{
|
||||
/* Memory, top-level pagetable, code startpoint and size of the
|
||||
* (optional) initrd. */
|
||||
unsigned long mem = 0, pgdir, start, initrd_size = 0;
|
||||
unsigned long mem = 0, start, initrd_size = 0;
|
||||
/* Two temporaries and the /dev/lguest file descriptor. */
|
||||
int i, c, lguest_fd;
|
||||
/* The boot information for the Guest. */
|
||||
@ -2040,9 +1995,6 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
||||
boot->hdr.type_of_loader = 0xFF;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Set up the initial linear pagetables, starting below the initrd. */
|
||||
pgdir = setup_pagetables(mem, initrd_size);
|
||||
|
||||
/* The Linux boot header contains an "E820" memory map: ours is a
|
||||
* simple, single region. */
|
||||
boot->e820_entries = 1;
|
||||
@ -2064,7 +2016,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
|
||||
|
||||
/* We tell the kernel to initialize the Guest: this returns the open
|
||||
* /dev/lguest file descriptor. */
|
||||
lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start);
|
||||
lguest_fd = tell_kernel(start);
|
||||
|
||||
/* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the
|
||||
* input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the Waker, and
|
||||
|
@ -71,35 +71,50 @@ Look at the current lock statistics:
|
||||
|
||||
# less /proc/lock_stat
|
||||
|
||||
01 lock_stat version 0.2
|
||||
01 lock_stat version 0.3
|
||||
02 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total
|
||||
04 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
05
|
||||
06 &inode->i_data.tree_lock-W: 15 21657 0.18 1093295.30 11547131054.85 58 10415 0.16 87.51 6387.60
|
||||
07 &inode->i_data.tree_lock-R: 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 23302 231198 0.25 8.45 98023.38
|
||||
08 --------------------------
|
||||
09 &inode->i_data.tree_lock 0 [<ffffffff8027c08f>] add_to_page_cache+0x5f/0x190
|
||||
10
|
||||
11 ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
|
||||
12
|
||||
13 dcache_lock: 1037 1161 0.38 45.32 774.51 6611 243371 0.15 306.48 77387.24
|
||||
14 -----------
|
||||
15 dcache_lock 180 [<ffffffff802c0d7e>] sys_getcwd+0x11e/0x230
|
||||
16 dcache_lock 165 [<ffffffff802c002a>] d_alloc+0x15a/0x210
|
||||
17 dcache_lock 33 [<ffffffff8035818d>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x4d/0x70
|
||||
18 dcache_lock 1 [<ffffffff802beef8>] shrink_dcache_parent+0x18/0x130
|
||||
06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 233 538 18446744073708 22924.27 607243.51 1342 45806 1.71 8595.89 1180582.34
|
||||
07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 205 587 18446744073708 28403.36 731975.00 1940 412426 0.58 187825.45 6307502.88
|
||||
08 ---------------
|
||||
09 &mm->mmap_sem 487 [<ffffffff8053491f>] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928
|
||||
10 &mm->mmap_sem 179 [<ffffffff802a6200>] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d
|
||||
11 &mm->mmap_sem 279 [<ffffffff80210a57>] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce
|
||||
12 &mm->mmap_sem 76 [<ffffffff802a490b>] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59
|
||||
13 ---------------
|
||||
14 &mm->mmap_sem 270 [<ffffffff80210a57>] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce
|
||||
15 &mm->mmap_sem 431 [<ffffffff8053491f>] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928
|
||||
16 &mm->mmap_sem 138 [<ffffffff802a490b>] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59
|
||||
17 &mm->mmap_sem 145 [<ffffffff802a6200>] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d
|
||||
18
|
||||
19 ...............................................................................................................................................................................................
|
||||
20
|
||||
21 dcache_lock: 621 623 0.52 118.26 1053.02 6745 91930 0.29 316.29 118423.41
|
||||
22 -----------
|
||||
23 dcache_lock 179 [<ffffffff80378274>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54
|
||||
24 dcache_lock 113 [<ffffffff802cc17b>] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb
|
||||
25 dcache_lock 99 [<ffffffff802ca0dc>] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44
|
||||
26 dcache_lock 104 [<ffffffff802cbca0>] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a
|
||||
27 -----------
|
||||
28 dcache_lock 192 [<ffffffff80378274>] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54
|
||||
29 dcache_lock 98 [<ffffffff802ca0dc>] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44
|
||||
30 dcache_lock 72 [<ffffffff802cc17b>] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb
|
||||
31 dcache_lock 112 [<ffffffff802cbca0>] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a
|
||||
|
||||
This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the
|
||||
output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04
|
||||
show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-10 and 13-18 show the actual
|
||||
show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-18 and 20-31 show the actual
|
||||
statistics. These statistics come in two parts; the actual stats separated by a
|
||||
short separator (line 08, 14) from the contention points.
|
||||
short separator (line 08, 13) from the contention points.
|
||||
|
||||
The first lock (05-10) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the
|
||||
The first lock (05-18) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the
|
||||
short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors,
|
||||
they have two: contentions and [<IP>] symbol.
|
||||
they have two: contentions and [<IP>] symbol. The second set of contention
|
||||
points are the points we're contending with.
|
||||
|
||||
The integer part of the time values is in us.
|
||||
|
||||
View the top contending locks:
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -125,14 +125,14 @@ TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E trident_card sound/oss/trident.c
|
||||
ROUTER_MAGIC 0x524d4157 wan_device include/linux/wanrouter.h
|
||||
SCC_MAGIC 0x52696368 gs_port drivers/char/scc.h
|
||||
SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1 0x53415645 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c
|
||||
GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda include/asm-mips64/sn/gda.h
|
||||
GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
|
||||
RED_MAGIC1 0x5a2cf071 (any) mm/slab.c
|
||||
STL_PORTMAGIC 0x5a7182c9 stlport include/linux/stallion.h
|
||||
EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE 0x5ab478d2 lanai_dev drivers/atm/lanai.c
|
||||
HDLCDRV_MAGIC 0x5ac6e778 hdlcdrv_state include/linux/hdlcdrv.h
|
||||
EPCA_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel include/linux/epca.h
|
||||
PCXX_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel drivers/char/pcxx.h
|
||||
KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s include/asm-mips64/sn/klkernvars.h
|
||||
KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h
|
||||
I810_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 i810_state sound/oss/i810_audio.c
|
||||
TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 trient_state sound/oss/trident.c
|
||||
M3_CARD_MAGIC 0x646e6f50 m3_card sound/oss/maestro3.c
|
||||
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ CCB_MAGIC 0xf2691ad2 ccb drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c
|
||||
QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE 0xf7e1c9a3 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
|
||||
QUEUE_MAGIC_USED 0xf7e1cc33 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
|
||||
HTB_CMAGIC 0xFEFAFEF1 htb_class net/sched/sch_htb.c
|
||||
NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s include/asm-mips64/sn/nmi.h
|
||||
NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h
|
||||
|
||||
Note that there are also defined special per-driver magic numbers in sound
|
||||
memory management. See include/sound/sndmagic.h for complete list of them. Many
|
||||
|
@ -51,11 +51,16 @@ to call) for the specific marker through marker_probe_register() and can be
|
||||
activated by calling marker_arm(). Marker deactivation can be done by calling
|
||||
marker_disarm() as many times as marker_arm() has been called. Removing a probe
|
||||
is done through marker_probe_unregister(); it will disarm the probe.
|
||||
marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit
|
||||
function to make sure there is no caller left using the probe. This, and the
|
||||
fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure that probe
|
||||
removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section below for a
|
||||
sample probe module.
|
||||
|
||||
marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called between probe unregistration and
|
||||
the first occurrence of
|
||||
- the end of module exit function,
|
||||
to make sure there is no caller left using the probe;
|
||||
- the free of any resource used by the probes,
|
||||
to make sure the probes wont be accessing invalid data.
|
||||
This, and the fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure
|
||||
that probe removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section
|
||||
below for a sample probe module.
|
||||
|
||||
The marker mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the same marker.
|
||||
Markers can be put in inline functions, inlined static functions, and
|
||||
@ -70,6 +75,20 @@ a printk warning which identifies the inconsistency:
|
||||
|
||||
"Format mismatch for probe probe_name (format), marker (format)"
|
||||
|
||||
Another way to use markers is to simply define the marker without generating any
|
||||
function call to actually call into the marker. This is useful in combination
|
||||
with tracepoint probes in a scheme like this :
|
||||
|
||||
void probe_tracepoint_name(unsigned int arg1, struct task_struct *tsk);
|
||||
|
||||
DEFINE_MARKER_TP(marker_eventname, tracepoint_name, probe_tracepoint_name,
|
||||
"arg1 %u pid %d");
|
||||
|
||||
notrace void probe_tracepoint_name(unsigned int arg1, struct task_struct *tsk)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct marker *marker = &GET_MARKER(kernel_irq_entry);
|
||||
/* write data to trace buffers ... */
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
* Probe / marker example
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ config options.
|
||||
This option can be kernel module too.
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------
|
||||
3 sysfs files for memory hotplug
|
||||
4 sysfs files for memory hotplug
|
||||
--------------------------------
|
||||
All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as
|
||||
|
||||
@ -138,11 +138,12 @@ For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at
|
||||
(0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4)
|
||||
This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000)
|
||||
|
||||
Under each section, you can see 3 files.
|
||||
Under each section, you can see 4 files.
|
||||
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable
|
||||
|
||||
'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX.
|
||||
'state' : read-write
|
||||
@ -150,10 +151,20 @@ Under each section, you can see 3 files.
|
||||
at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command
|
||||
'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device.
|
||||
This is not well implemented now.
|
||||
'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating
|
||||
whether the memory section is removable or not
|
||||
removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory
|
||||
section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that
|
||||
it is not removable.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE:
|
||||
These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase.
|
||||
|
||||
If CONFIG_NUMA is enabled the
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX memory section
|
||||
directories can also be accessed via symbolic links located in
|
||||
the /sys/devices/system/node/node* directories. For example:
|
||||
/sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9
|
||||
|
||||
--------------------------------
|
||||
4. Physical memory hot-add phase
|
||||
@ -365,7 +376,6 @@ node if necessary.
|
||||
- allowing memory hot-add to ZONE_MOVABLE. maybe we need some switch like
|
||||
sysctl or new control file.
|
||||
- showing memory section and physical device relationship.
|
||||
- showing memory section and node relationship (maybe good for NUMA)
|
||||
- showing memory section is under ZONE_MOVABLE or not
|
||||
- test and make it better memory offlining.
|
||||
- support HugeTLB page migration and offlining.
|
||||
|
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATABILITY
|
||||
|
||||
Two files are introduced:
|
||||
|
||||
a) 'include/asm-mips/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
|
||||
a) 'arch/mips/include/asm/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
|
||||
containes : struct _auide_hwif
|
||||
timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4
|
||||
timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2
|
||||
@ -52,14 +52,12 @@ Two files are introduced:
|
||||
b) 'drivers/ide/mips/au1xxx-ide.c'
|
||||
contains the functionality of the AU1XXX IDE driver
|
||||
|
||||
Four configs variables are introduced:
|
||||
Following extra configs variables are introduced:
|
||||
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_PIO_DBDMA - enable the PIO+DBDMA mode
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA - enable the MWDMA mode
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_BURSTABLE_ON - set Burstable FIFO in DBDMA
|
||||
controller
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ - maximum transfer size
|
||||
per descriptor
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SUPPORTED IDE MODES
|
||||
@ -87,7 +85,6 @@ CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA_PCI=y
|
||||
CONFIG_IDEDMA_PCI_AUTO=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ=128
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA=y
|
||||
CONFIG_IDEDMA_AUTO=y
|
||||
|
||||
@ -105,7 +102,6 @@ CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA_PCI=y
|
||||
CONFIG_IDEDMA_PCI_AUTO=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA=y
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ=128
|
||||
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA=y
|
||||
CONFIG_IDEDMA_AUTO=y
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Where the supported parameter are:
|
||||
driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan
|
||||
for and associate to a network until it has been configured with
|
||||
one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring
|
||||
the network SSID. Default is 1 (auto-associate)
|
||||
the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate)
|
||||
|
||||
Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -194,6 +194,48 @@ or, for backwards compatibility, the option value. E.g.,
|
||||
|
||||
The parameters are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
ad_select
|
||||
|
||||
Specifies the 802.3ad aggregation selection logic to use. The
|
||||
possible values and their effects are:
|
||||
|
||||
stable or 0
|
||||
|
||||
The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate
|
||||
bandwidth.
|
||||
|
||||
Reselection of the active aggregator occurs only when all
|
||||
slaves of the active aggregator are down or the active
|
||||
aggregator has no slaves.
|
||||
|
||||
This is the default value.
|
||||
|
||||
bandwidth or 1
|
||||
|
||||
The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate
|
||||
bandwidth. Reselection occurs if:
|
||||
|
||||
- A slave is added to or removed from the bond
|
||||
|
||||
- Any slave's link state changes
|
||||
|
||||
- Any slave's 802.3ad association state changes
|
||||
|
||||
- The bond's adminstrative state changes to up
|
||||
|
||||
count or 2
|
||||
|
||||
The active aggregator is chosen by the largest number of
|
||||
ports (slaves). Reselection occurs as described under the
|
||||
"bandwidth" setting, above.
|
||||
|
||||
The bandwidth and count selection policies permit failover of
|
||||
802.3ad aggregations when partial failure of the active aggregator
|
||||
occurs. This keeps the aggregator with the highest availability
|
||||
(either in bandwidth or in number of ports) active at all times.
|
||||
|
||||
This option was added in bonding version 3.4.0.
|
||||
|
||||
arp_interval
|
||||
|
||||
Specifies the ARP link monitoring frequency in milliseconds.
|
||||
@ -551,6 +593,16 @@ num_grat_arp
|
||||
affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for
|
||||
bonding version 3.3.0.
|
||||
|
||||
num_unsol_na
|
||||
|
||||
Specifies the number of unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements
|
||||
to be issued after a failover event. One unsolicited NA is issued
|
||||
immediately after the failover.
|
||||
|
||||
The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option
|
||||
affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for
|
||||
bonding version 3.4.0.
|
||||
|
||||
primary
|
||||
|
||||
A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the
|
||||
@ -922,17 +974,19 @@ USERCTL=no
|
||||
NETMASK, NETWORK and BROADCAST) to match your network configuration.
|
||||
|
||||
For later versions of initscripts, such as that found with Fedora
|
||||
7 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 5 (or later), it is possible, and,
|
||||
indeed, preferable, to specify the bonding options in the ifcfg-bond0
|
||||
7 (or later) and Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 5 (or later), it is possible,
|
||||
and, indeed, preferable, to specify the bonding options in the ifcfg-bond0
|
||||
file, e.g. a line of the format:
|
||||
|
||||
BONDING_OPTS="mode=active-backup arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.254"
|
||||
BONDING_OPTS="mode=active-backup arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.1.254"
|
||||
|
||||
will configure the bond with the specified options. The options
|
||||
specified in BONDING_OPTS are identical to the bonding module parameters
|
||||
except for the arp_ip_target field. Each target should be included as a
|
||||
separate option and should be preceded by a '+' to indicate it should be
|
||||
added to the list of queried targets, e.g.,
|
||||
except for the arp_ip_target field when using versions of initscripts older
|
||||
than and 8.57 (Fedora 8) and 8.45.19 (Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2). When
|
||||
using older versions each target should be included as a separate option and
|
||||
should be preceded by a '+' to indicate it should be added to the list of
|
||||
queried targets, e.g.,
|
||||
|
||||
arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.1 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.2
|
||||
|
||||
@ -940,7 +994,7 @@ added to the list of queried targets, e.g.,
|
||||
options via BONDING_OPTS, it is not necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf or
|
||||
/etc/modprobe.conf.
|
||||
|
||||
For older versions of initscripts that do not support
|
||||
For even older versions of initscripts that do not support
|
||||
BONDING_OPTS, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf (or
|
||||
/etc/modprobe.conf, depending upon your distro) to load the bonding module
|
||||
with your desired options when the bond0 interface is brought up. The
|
||||
|
@ -57,6 +57,24 @@ can be set before calling bind().
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet
|
||||
size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14.
|
||||
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs
|
||||
supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants).
|
||||
The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t.
|
||||
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same
|
||||
time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is
|
||||
preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same
|
||||
type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well
|
||||
understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or
|
||||
an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs
|
||||
must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen().
|
||||
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets
|
||||
the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID.
|
||||
Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t.
|
||||
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID.
|
||||
|
||||
DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold
|
||||
timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is
|
||||
that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait
|
||||
@ -115,20 +133,12 @@ retries2
|
||||
importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation,
|
||||
data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2.
|
||||
|
||||
send_ndp = 1
|
||||
Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2).
|
||||
|
||||
send_ackvec = 1
|
||||
Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5).
|
||||
|
||||
ack_ratio = 2
|
||||
The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use.
|
||||
|
||||
tx_ccid = 2
|
||||
Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection.
|
||||
Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the
|
||||
choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically.
|
||||
|
||||
rx_ccid = 2
|
||||
Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection.
|
||||
Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid.
|
||||
|
||||
seq_window = 100
|
||||
The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2).
|
||||
|
@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Transmit path guidelines:
|
||||
static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb,
|
||||
struct net_device *dev)
|
||||
{
|
||||
struct drv *dp = dev->priv;
|
||||
struct drv *dp = netdev_priv(dev);
|
||||
|
||||
lock_tx(dp);
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
@ -3,15 +3,15 @@ Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Generic HDLC layer currently supports:
|
||||
1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI).
|
||||
1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI)
|
||||
- Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation)
|
||||
interfaces can share a single PVC.
|
||||
- ARP support (no InARP support in the kernel - there is an
|
||||
experimental InARP user-space daemon available on:
|
||||
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/).
|
||||
2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation.
|
||||
3. Cisco HDLC.
|
||||
4. PPP (uses syncppp.c).
|
||||
2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation
|
||||
3. Cisco HDLC
|
||||
4. PPP
|
||||
5. X.25 (uses X.25 routines).
|
||||
|
||||
Generic HDLC is a protocol driver only - it needs a low-level driver
|
||||
|
@ -27,6 +27,12 @@ min_adv_mss - INTEGER
|
||||
The advertised MSS depends on the first hop route MTU, but will
|
||||
never be lower than this setting.
|
||||
|
||||
rt_cache_rebuild_count - INTEGER
|
||||
The per net-namespace route cache emergency rebuild threshold.
|
||||
Any net-namespace having its route cache rebuilt due to
|
||||
a hash bucket chain being too long more than this many times
|
||||
will have its route caching disabled
|
||||
|
||||
IP Fragmentation:
|
||||
|
||||
ipfrag_high_thresh - INTEGER
|
||||
|
@ -50,10 +50,6 @@ associates with the AP. hostapd and wpa_supplicant are used to take
|
||||
care of WPA2-PSK authentication. In addition, hostapd is also
|
||||
processing access point side of association.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that the current Linux kernel does not enable AP mode, so a
|
||||
simple patch is needed to enable AP mode selection:
|
||||
http://johannes.sipsolutions.net/patches/kernel/all/LATEST/006-allow-ap-vlan-modes.patch
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
# Build mac80211_hwsim as part of kernel configuration
|
||||
|
||||
@ -65,3 +61,8 @@ hostapd hostapd.conf
|
||||
|
||||
# Run wpa_supplicant (station) for wlan1
|
||||
wpa_supplicant -Dwext -iwlan1 -c wpa_supplicant.conf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
More test cases are available in hostap.git:
|
||||
git://w1.fi/srv/git/hostap.git and mac80211_hwsim/tests subdirectory
|
||||
(http://w1.fi/gitweb/gitweb.cgi?p=hostap.git;a=tree;f=mac80211_hwsim/tests)
|
||||
|
@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ There are routines in net_init.c to handle the common cases of
|
||||
alloc_etherdev, alloc_netdev. These reserve extra space for driver
|
||||
private data which gets freed when the network device is freed. If
|
||||
separately allocated data is attached to the network device
|
||||
(dev->priv) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that.
|
||||
(netdev_priv(dev)) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that.
|
||||
|
||||
MTU
|
||||
===
|
||||
|
@ -131,11 +131,13 @@ are expected to do this during initialization.
|
||||
|
||||
r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2);
|
||||
if (!r)
|
||||
regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL);
|
||||
regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2);
|
||||
|
||||
Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain:
|
||||
--------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
[NOTE: This API is not currently available, it can be added when required]
|
||||
|
||||
If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your
|
||||
driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain
|
||||
structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should
|
||||
@ -167,7 +169,6 @@ struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = {
|
||||
|
||||
Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered:
|
||||
|
||||
int r;
|
||||
struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd;
|
||||
int size_of_regd;
|
||||
int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules;
|
||||
@ -178,17 +179,12 @@ Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered:
|
||||
|
||||
rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL);
|
||||
if (!rd)
|
||||
return -ENOMEM;
|
||||
return -ENOMEM;
|
||||
|
||||
memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain));
|
||||
|
||||
for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) {
|
||||
memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i],
|
||||
sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
|
||||
}
|
||||
r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd);
|
||||
if (r) {
|
||||
kfree(rd);
|
||||
return r;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++)
|
||||
memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i],
|
||||
&mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i],
|
||||
sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
|
||||
regulatory_struct_hint(rd);
|
||||
|
@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ A client would issue an operation by:
|
||||
MSG_MORE should be set in msghdr::msg_flags on all but the last part of
|
||||
the request. Multiple requests may be made simultaneously.
|
||||
|
||||
If a call is intended to go to a destination other then the default
|
||||
If a call is intended to go to a destination other than the default
|
||||
specified through connect(), then msghdr::msg_name should be set on the
|
||||
first request message of that call.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ As mentioned above, main purpose of TUN/TAP driver is tunneling.
|
||||
It is used by VTun (http://vtun.sourceforge.net).
|
||||
|
||||
Another interesting application using TUN/TAP is pipsecd
|
||||
(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), an userspace IPSec
|
||||
(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), a userspace IPSec
|
||||
implementation that can use complete kernel routing (unlike FreeS/WAN).
|
||||
|
||||
3. How does Virtual network device actually work ?
|
||||
|
@ -69,6 +69,11 @@ to the overall system performance.
|
||||
On x86 nmi_watchdog is disabled by default so you have to enable it with
|
||||
a boot time parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
It's possible to disable the NMI watchdog in run-time by writing "0" to
|
||||
/proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog. Writing "1" to the same file will re-enable
|
||||
the NMI watchdog. Notice that you still need to use "nmi_watchdog=" parameter
|
||||
at boot time.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: In kernels prior to 2.4.2-ac18 the NMI-oopser is enabled unconditionally
|
||||
on x86 SMP boxes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -109,12 +109,18 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
|
||||
FURTHER NOTES ON NO-MMU MMAP
|
||||
============================
|
||||
|
||||
(*) A request for a private mapping of less than a page in size may not return
|
||||
a page-aligned buffer. This is because the kernel calls kmalloc() to
|
||||
allocate the buffer, not get_free_page().
|
||||
(*) A request for a private mapping of a file may return a buffer that is not
|
||||
page-aligned. This is because XIP may take place, and the data may not be
|
||||
paged aligned in the backing store.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) A list of all the mappings on the system is visible through /proc/maps in
|
||||
no-MMU mode.
|
||||
(*) A request for an anonymous mapping will always be page aligned. If
|
||||
possible the size of the request should be a power of two otherwise some
|
||||
of the space may be wasted as the kernel must allocate a power-of-2
|
||||
granule but will only discard the excess if appropriately configured as
|
||||
this has an effect on fragmentation.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) A list of all the private copy and anonymous mappings on the system is
|
||||
visible through /proc/maps in no-MMU mode.
|
||||
|
||||
(*) A list of all the mappings in use by a process is visible through
|
||||
/proc/<pid>/maps in no-MMU mode.
|
||||
@ -242,3 +248,18 @@ PROVIDING SHAREABLE BLOCK DEVICE SUPPORT
|
||||
Provision of shared mappings on block device files is exactly the same as for
|
||||
character devices. If there isn't a real device underneath, then the driver
|
||||
should allocate sufficient contiguous memory to honour any supported mapping.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=================================
|
||||
ADJUSTING PAGE TRIMMING BEHAVIOUR
|
||||
=================================
|
||||
|
||||
NOMMU mmap automatically rounds up to the nearest power-of-2 number of pages
|
||||
when performing an allocation. This can have adverse effects on memory
|
||||
fragmentation, and as such, is left configurable. The default behaviour is to
|
||||
aggressively trim allocations and discard any excess pages back in to the page
|
||||
allocator. In order to retain finer-grained control over fragmentation, this
|
||||
behaviour can either be disabled completely, or bumped up to a higher page
|
||||
watermark where trimming begins.
|
||||
|
||||
Page trimming behaviour is configurable via the sysctl `vm.nr_trim_pages'.
|
||||
|
@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ anyways).
|
||||
|
||||
After detecting the processor type, the kernel patches out sections of code
|
||||
that shouldn't be used by writing nop's over it. Using cpufeatures requires
|
||||
just 2 macros (found in include/asm-ppc/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
|
||||
just 2 macros (found in arch/powerpc/include/asm/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
|
||||
transfer_to_handler:
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef CONFIG_ALTIVEC
|
||||
|
39
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt
Normal file
39
Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
|
||||
AMCC NDFC (NanD Flash Controller)
|
||||
|
||||
Required properties:
|
||||
- compatible : "ibm,ndfc".
|
||||
- reg : should specify chip select and size used for the chip (0x2000).
|
||||
|
||||
Optional properties:
|
||||
- ccr : NDFC config and control register value (default 0).
|
||||
- bank-settings : NDFC bank configuration register value (default 0).
|
||||
|
||||
Notes:
|
||||
- partition(s) - follows the OF MTD standard for partitions
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
ndfc@1,0 {
|
||||
compatible = "ibm,ndfc";
|
||||
reg = <0x00000001 0x00000000 0x00002000>;
|
||||
ccr = <0x00001000>;
|
||||
bank-settings = <0x80002222>;
|
||||
#address-cells = <1>;
|
||||
#size-cells = <1>;
|
||||
|
||||
nand {
|
||||
#address-cells = <1>;
|
||||
#size-cells = <1>;
|
||||
|
||||
partition@0 {
|
||||
label = "kernel";
|
||||
reg = <0x00000000 0x00200000>;
|
||||
};
|
||||
partition@200000 {
|
||||
label = "root";
|
||||
reg = <0x00200000 0x03E00000>;
|
||||
};
|
||||
};
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA.
|
||||
|
||||
Required properities:
|
||||
- compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis".
|
||||
- reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register
|
||||
- reg : should contain the address and the length of the FPPGA register
|
||||
set.
|
||||
|
||||
Example (MPC8610HPCD):
|
||||
@ -27,3 +27,33 @@ Example (MPC8610HPCD):
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis";
|
||||
reg = <0xe8000000 32>;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
* Freescale BCSR GPIO banks
|
||||
|
||||
Some BCSR registers act as simple GPIO controllers, each such
|
||||
register can be represented by the gpio-controller node.
|
||||
|
||||
Required properities:
|
||||
- compatible : Should be "fsl,<board>-bcsr-gpio".
|
||||
- reg : Should contain the address and the length of the GPIO bank
|
||||
register.
|
||||
- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
|
||||
second cell is used to specify optional paramters (currently unused).
|
||||
- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
|
||||
|
||||
Example:
|
||||
|
||||
bcsr@1,0 {
|
||||
#address-cells = <1>;
|
||||
#size-cells = <1>;
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr";
|
||||
reg = <1 0 0x8000>;
|
||||
ranges = <0 1 0 0x8000>;
|
||||
|
||||
bcsr13: gpio-controller@d {
|
||||
#gpio-cells = <2>;
|
||||
compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr-gpio";
|
||||
reg = <0xd 1>;
|
||||
gpio-controller;
|
||||
};
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
|
||||
|
||||
The MDIO is a bus to which the PHY devices are connected. For each
|
||||
device that exists on this bus, a child node should be created. See
|
||||
the definition of the PHY node below for an example of how to define
|
||||
a PHY.
|
||||
the definition of the PHY node in booting-without-of.txt for an example
|
||||
of how to define a PHY.
|
||||
|
||||
Required properties:
|
||||
- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
|
||||
@ -21,6 +21,14 @@ Example:
|
||||
};
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
* TBI Internal MDIO bus
|
||||
|
||||
As of this writing, every tsec is associated with an internal TBI PHY.
|
||||
This PHY is accessed through the local MDIO bus. These buses are defined
|
||||
similarly to the mdio buses, except they are compatible with "fsl,gianfar-tbi".
|
||||
The TBI PHYs underneath them are similar to normal PHYs, but the reg property
|
||||
is considered instructive, rather than descriptive. The reg property should
|
||||
be chosen so it doesn't interfere with other PHYs on the bus.
|
||||
|
||||
* Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -191,12 +191,20 @@ Userspace input handlers (uevents) or kernel input handlers (rfkill-input):
|
||||
to tell the devices registered with the rfkill class to change
|
||||
their state (i.e. translates the input layer event into real
|
||||
action).
|
||||
|
||||
* rfkill-input implements EPO by handling EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 0
|
||||
(power off all transmitters) in a special way: it ignores any
|
||||
overrides and local state cache and forces all transmitters to the
|
||||
RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED state (including those which are already
|
||||
supposed to be BLOCKED). Note that the opposite event (power on all
|
||||
transmitters) is handled normally.
|
||||
supposed to be BLOCKED).
|
||||
* rfkill EPO will remain active until rfkill-input receives an
|
||||
EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 1 event. While the EPO is active, transmitters
|
||||
are locked in the blocked state (rfkill will refuse to unblock them).
|
||||
* rfkill-input implements different policies that the user can
|
||||
select for handling EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 1. It will unlock rfkill,
|
||||
and either do nothing (leave transmitters blocked, but now unlocked),
|
||||
restore the transmitters to their state before the EPO, or unblock
|
||||
them all.
|
||||
|
||||
Userspace uevent handler or kernel platform-specific drivers hooked to the
|
||||
rfkill notifier chain:
|
||||
@ -331,11 +339,9 @@ class to get a sysfs interface :-)
|
||||
correct event for your switch/button. These events are emergency power-off
|
||||
events when they are trying to turn the transmitters off. An example of an
|
||||
input device which SHOULD generate *_RFKILL_ALL events is the wireless-kill
|
||||
switch in a laptop which is NOT a hotkey, but a real switch that kills radios
|
||||
in hardware, even if the O.S. has gone to lunch. An example of an input device
|
||||
which SHOULD NOT generate *_RFKILL_ALL events by default, is any sort of hot
|
||||
key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific
|
||||
(e.g. the one for WLAN).
|
||||
switch in a laptop which is NOT a hotkey, but a real sliding/rocker switch.
|
||||
An example of an input device which SHOULD NOT generate *_RFKILL_ALL events by
|
||||
default, is any sort of hot key that is type-specific (e.g. the one for WLAN).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers
|
||||
|
@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Syscalls are implemented on Linux for S390 by the Supervisor call instruction (S
|
||||
possibilities of these as the instruction is made up of a 0xA opcode & the second byte being
|
||||
the syscall number. They are traced using the simple command.
|
||||
TR SVC <Optional value or range>
|
||||
the syscalls are defined in linux/include/asm-s390/unistd.h
|
||||
the syscalls are defined in linux/arch/s390/include/asm/unistd.h
|
||||
e.g. to trace all file opens just do
|
||||
TR SVC 5 ( as this is the syscall number of open )
|
||||
|
||||
|
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Reference in New Issue
Block a user